Count and Rate Meters

Count and Rate Meters
Bulletin No. CUB5T-A
Drawing No. LP0628
Released 7/06
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion.net
MODEL CUB5T - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC PRESET TIMER
AND CYCLE COUNTER
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR RED/GREEN LED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.46" (11.7 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z 7-DIGIT BI-DIRECTIONAL TIMING CAPABILITY
z 6-DIGIT CYCLE COUNTING CAPABILITY
z OPTIONAL RELAY OUTPUT MODULE
z OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS MODULE (RS232 or RS485)
z SELECTABLE TIMER RANGES AND OPERATING MODES
z ELAPSED TIMER AND PRESET TIMER FUNCTIONALITY
C
U
L
R
z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT PRESET OUTPUT
US LISTED
z OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The CUB5T provides the ultimate in timer flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional relay output and serial communications capability.
The meter functions as an Elapsed Timer or Preset Timer. It also has a built-in
Cycle Counter. The display can be toggled either manually or automatically
between the Timer and Cycle Counter values. With eight different input
operating modes and 18 selectable timer ranges, the meter can be programmed
for a wide variety of timing applications.
The CUB5T has an LCD display with 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits. The LCD
is available in two versions, reflective (CUB5TR00) and backlight
(CUB5TB00). The backlight version is user selectable for red or green
backlighting with variable display intensity.
The Timer has two signal inputs and eight input operating modes. These
modes provide level active or edge triggered start/stop operation. A Display
Hold mode will display the elapsed time for one cycle, while the next cycle
continues timing internally. The Timer Reset modes will automatically reset the
timer value when a time start edge is applied to the input. This allows sequential
timing cycles without having to manually reset the Timer.
In addition to the Timer inputs, a programmable User Input is available to
perform a variety of meter functions. All inputs are current sinking (active low)
and accept a variety of logic and open-collector output signal sources. Relay and
switch contacts can also be used as signal sources, when the software input
debounce filter is enabled.
The capability of the CUB5T can be easily expanded with the addition of a
field installable option module. When the CUB5RLY0 relay output module is
added, the meter becomes a Preset Timer. The Setpoint Output can be assigned
to the Timer or Cycle Counter values, and configured to suit a variety of control
and alarm requirements. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485
is added with a serial option module (CUB5COM).
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
The CUB5T can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5T.
The MLPS1 is powered from an 85 to 250 VAC source and provides up to 400
mA to drive the meter and sensors.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this meter to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the meter.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.
1
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE
MODEL NO.
CUB5T
Optional Plug-in Cards
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
CUB5TR
Preset Timer and Cycle Counter with Reflective Display
CUB5TB
Preset Timer and Cycle Counter with Backlight Display
CUB5TB00
CUB5RLY
Single Relay Option Card
CUB5RLY0
RS485 Serial Communications Card
CUB5COM1
RS232 Serial Communications Card
CUB5COM2
CUB5COM
CUB5TR00
MLPS1
Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC
MLPS1000
CBLPRO
Programming Cable RS232 (RJ11-DB9)
CBLPROG0
CBPRO
Programming Cable RS485 (RJ11-DB9)
CBPRO007
GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TR00: -35 to 75°C
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TB00 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
1. DISPLAY: 8 digit LCD 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits
CUB5TR00: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5TB00: Selectable transmissive red or green backlight LED with
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability at preset when
using a relay module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a Class 2 or SELV
rated power supply.
MODEL
NUMBER
DISPLAY COLOR
INPUT CURRENT
WITHOUT
CUB5RLY0
INPUT CURRENT
WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5TR00
CUB5TB00
CUB5TB00
--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)
10 mA
85 mA
95 mA
30 mA
115 mA
125 mA
INTENSITY LEVEL
Red Display
Green Display
1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5
TEMPERATURE
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C
Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5
hours.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 40 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
3. TIMER DISPLAY: 7-digits
Display Designator: “t” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 9999999
Overflow/Underflow Indication: Display flashes “t OVEr”
Minimum Digit Resolution: 0.001 Sec.
Maximum Single Digit Resolution: 1 Hr.
Timing Accuracy: ±0.01%
4. CYCLE COUNTER DISPLAY: 6-digits, may be disabled if not used
Display Designator: “C” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 999999
Overflow/Underflow Indication: Display flashes “C
OVEr”
Maximum Count Rate:
All Count Sources except Input B: 10 Hz
Input B Count Source:
With Timer Input Filter ON: 10 Hz
With Timer Input Filter OFF: 500 Hz
5. TIMER SIGNAL INPUTS (INP A and INP B)
Logic Inputs, Current Sinking (active low)
Input A:
Internal 7.8KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.25 V max; VIH = 2.75 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Input B:
Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Inputs A and B:
Timer Input Pulse Width: 1 msec min.
Timer Start/Stop Response Time: 1 msec max.
Filter: Software filtering provided for relay or switch contact debounce.
Filter enabled or disabled through programming. If enabled, results in
50 msec start/stop response time for successive pulses applied to the
same input terminal.
6. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable function input
Logic Input, Current Sinking (active low)
Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and timer/counter values when power is removed.
8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
11. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
12. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)
2
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the meter before
installing Plug-in card.
The CUB5T meters can be fitted with optional relay card and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38400
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable. 2 msec min. or 50 msec min.
RELAY CARD
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.
Time Accuracy: ± 0.01%
1.0 INSTALLING
THE
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38400
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
METER
INSTALLATION
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approx. 28 to 36 in-oz [0.202 to 0.26 N-m]). Do not over-tighten the screws.
The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the unit into the panel cutout.
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near devices that
generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
2.0 DIP SWITCHES
The DIP switches on the main circuit board are not used with the CUB5T and
must be left in the factory set position (all down). Setting any switch to the up
position may cause improper operation of the meter.
3
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter after the rear
cover is removed
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the meter before
installing Plug-in Card.
Comms Card
Relay Card
REMOVING THE REAR COVER
To remove the rear cover, locate the cover locking tab below the 2nd and 3rd
input terminals. To release the tab, insert a small, flat blade screwdriver between
the tab and the plastic wall below the terminals. Inserting the screwdriver will
provide enough pressure to release the tab locks. To replace the cover, align the
cover with the input terminals and press down until the cover snaps into place.
4.0 WIRING
THE
CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge static
charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal object.
Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean workstation. Also,
only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or other contaminants
that may contact the cards can adversely affect circuit operation.
METER
WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed
(stranded wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct
screw-clamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.
4
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.1 POWER WIRING
4.2 USER INPUT WIRING
DC Power
Sinking Logic
+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC
INP COMM
USR
}
Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and Input Common.
The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low.
4.3 INPUT WIRING
CAUTION: Power input common is NOT isolated from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the power input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential
of the user input common with respect to earth ground; and the common of the plug-in cards with respect to input common.
Current Sinking Output
Interfacing With TTL
Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink
Input A
Input A
Input A
4.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
4.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD
RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS
5
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.0 REVIEWING
THE
FRONT BUTTONS
AND
DISPLAY
KEY
DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
ENTERING PROGRAM MODE
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
SEL
Select display (timer or cycle counter)
Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
RST
Reset value(s) per Front Panel Reset setting
OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“t” - To the left of the display is the timer value.
“C” - To the left of the display is the cycle counter value.
Advances through the program menu
Increments selected parameter value or selection
“1” - To the upper left of the display indicates the setpoint status.
If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between the timer and cycle counter values.
6.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL KEY)
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL KEY)
It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL key. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock (See Module 3).
The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the SEL key with Pro NO
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and
return the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to
the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)
PROGRAMMING TIPS
MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST KEYS)
It is recommended to start with Module 1 and proceed through each module
in sequence. When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the
parameter programming and lock out parameter programming with the user
input or programming security code.
The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST key is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL key.
FACTORY SETTINGS
MODULE MENU (SEL KEY)
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 3. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.
Pressing the RST key on power-up will load the factory settings and display
rESEt. This allows operation in the event of a memory failure or corrupted data.
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The SEL key is pressed to advance to a particular parameter
to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding parameters.
After completing a module, the display will return to Pro NO. Programming
may continue by accessing additional modules.
ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.
SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The RST key is used to move through the
selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the SEL key, stores and activates the
displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to the next parameter.
For numeric values, press the RST key to access the value. The right hand
most digit will begin to flash. Pressing the RST key again increments the digit
by one or the user can hold the RST key and the digit will automatically scroll.
The SEL key will advance to the next digit. Pressing and holding the SEL key
will enter the value and move to the next parameter.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter
INPUtsOP «
ª
LEVEL
Selection/Value
Factory Settings are shown.
6
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.1 MODULE 1 - TIMER INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INPUt)
PARAMETER MENU
TIMER INPUT FILTER
TIMER RANGE
«
RANGE
ª 5555555
18 TIMER RANGE SELECTIONS
(S
= SEC;
N
= MIN;
H
d
= HR;
= DAY))
FILtEr
«
ª
ON
ON
OFF
Provides a 50 msec software debounce for the Timer Inputs (A and B). Select
RANGE
MAXIMUM
SELECTION DISPLAY
DISPLAY
RESOLUTION
RANGE
SELECTION
MAXIMUM
DISPLAY
DISPLAY RESOLUTION
ON when using relays or switch contacts as a signal source.
MINUTES/SECONDS
SECONDS
5555555
555555.5
55555.55
5555.555
1 SEC
9999999
999999.9
99999.99
9999.999
0.1 SEC
0.01 SEC
0.001 SEC
MINUTES
NNNNNNN
NNNNNN.N
NNNNN.NN
1 MIN
9999999
999999.9
99999.99
0.1 MIN
0.01 MIN
NNNNN.SS
NNNN.SS.S
NNN.SS.SS
HHHHHHH
HHHHHH.H
HHHHH.HH
1 HR
9999999
999999.9
99999.99
0.1 HR
TIMING DIRECTION
0.1 SEC
0.01 SEC
HOURS/MINUTES
HHHHH.NN
HHHH.NN.N
HHH.NN.NN
1 MIN
99999.59
9999.59.9
999.59.99
0.1 MIN
ª
UP
ddd.HH.NN
Ed9E-2
Ed-2srSt
HOLd-2
HOLdsrSt
TIMER STOP VALUE
t-StOP
«
ª
NO
Time Time
Stop Start
StOP VAL «
ª 0000000
Edge Triggered Operation -1 Input
Time
Stop
Time
Start
Time
Stop
INPUT A
INPUT B - Timer Inhibit (Level Active)
INPUT B - Timer Inhibit (Level Active)
Ed9E-2, Ed-2srSt
t-FLASH
ª
Time
Start
INPUT A
Time Start,
Display Update
RunsP-UP «
ª
StOP
Display
Update
INPUT A
Time
Stop
YES
NO
YES
TIMER RUN STATE AT POWER-UP
Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input,
with Display Hold
Time Start,
Display Update
«
Select YES to have the timer annunciator (t) flash when the timer is running.
HOLd-2, HOLdsrSt
Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input
INPUT B
0000000 to 9999999
FLASH TIMER ANNUNCIATOR
Time
Stop
Time
Start
INPUT A
Time
Stop
YES
Ed9E-1, Ed-1srSt
Level Active (Gated) Operation
Time
Start
NO
The Timer stops when this value is reached regardless of the signal levels on
the timer inputs. Selecting YES displays a sub-menu where the Stop Value is
entered in the same display format as the Timer Range selected. This stop
condition is cleared when a Timer Reset occurs or another start edge is applied
on the timer input. Select NO if a Stop Value is not desired.
For Reset Modes (rSt), the timer is reset at Time Start edge.
Time
Start
0000000 to 9999999
The Timer returns to this value whenever a Timer Reset occurs. The value is
entered in the same display format as the Timer Range selected. Non-zero
values are normally used for “timing down” applications, but they can also
provide an offset value when timing up.
This parameter determines how the Timer Input Signals affect the Run/Stop
status of the Timer. Timing diagrams are shown below for level active and edge
triggered (1-input or 2-input) operation. For single input modes (Input A only),
Input B provides a level active Timer Inhibit function. In the Display Hold
mode, the timer display value remains held and only updates when a Timer
Start (Input A) or Timer Stop (Input B) edge occurs.
The timer reset (rSt) operating modes are identical to the other modes in the
diagrams, except the timer display value is reset at the Time Start edges.
The Timer can also be stopped at a Timer Stop Value or at Setpoint output
activation or deactivation. This type of Stop condition is cleared when a Timer
Reset occurs, or another start edge is applied on the timer input.
LEVEL, LEVsrSt
dn
TIMER START VALUE
1 MIN
999.23.59
t-Strt «
ª 0000000
Ed9E-1
Ed-1srSt
UP
1 SEC
999.59.59
TIMER INPUT OPERATION
LEVEL
LEVsrSt
«
DAYS/HOURS/MINUTES
0.01 HR
INPUtsOP «
ª LEVEL
t-dir
Bi-directional timing capability. Select the timing direction desired for the
application.
0.01 MIN
HOURS/MINUTES/SECONDS
HHH.NN.SS
HOURS
1 SEC
99999.59
9999.59.9
999.59.99
StOP
SAVE
Determines the Run/Stop state of the Timer at Power-up. This parameter
does not apply to LEVEL Input Operation.
StOP - Timer Stopped at power-up, regardless of prior Run/Stop state
SAVE - Timer assumes the Run/Stop state it was in prior to power-down
Time Stop,
Display Update
INPUT B
7
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
USER INPUT FUNCTION (Cont’d)
TIMER RESET AT POWER-UP
RStsP-UP «
ª
YES
NO
YES
The Timer can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.
«
ª
NO
DISPLAY
MODE
DESCRIPTION
NO
Pro Loc
d-SELECt
rESEt
No Function
User Input disabled.
d-HOLd
Display Hold
Freeze display for the selected
value(s) while allowing time or
counts to accumulate internally.
Hold and Reset
Edge triggered reset of the
selected value(s) after
storing the time or count.
HOLd-rSt
See Programming Mode
Access chart (Module 3).
Toggle display with each
activation.
Level active reset of the
selected value(s).
Program Mode Lock-out
Display Select
(Edge triggered)
Maintained Reset
MODE
DESCRIPTION
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit timing or counting for the
selected value(s).
d-LEVEL
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)
Increase intensity one level
for each activation. (backlight
version only)
Print Request
Serial transmit of the active
parameters selected in the Print
Options menu (Module 5).
Prnt-r5t
Print and Reset
Same as Print Request followed
by a momentary reset of the
selected value(s).
r5t OUt
Reset Output
Edge triggered deactivation of
the Setpoint Output.
Print
USER INPUT FUNCTION
USErsINP
DISPLAY
USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT
t-VALUE
C-VALUE
both t-C
USErsASN «
ª t-VALVE
The User Input Assignment only applies if the cycle counter is enabled and
a selection of reset, display hold, hold and reset, inhibit, or print and reset is
selected in the User Input Function menu.
6.2 MODULE 2 - CYCLE COUNTER PARAMETERS (2-Count)
PARAMETER MENU
CYCLE COUNTER ENABLE
CntsEnb
ª
«
YES
NO
CYCLE COUNTER COUNTING DIRECTION
YES
Cntsdir
«
ª
UP
CYCLE COUNTER COUNT SOURCE
INPUtsb
USrsINP
t-rESEt
dn
Bi-directional counting capability. Select the counting direction desired for
the application.
When set to NO, the remaining Cycle Counter parameters are not accessible.
CntsSrc «
ª t-rESEt
UP
CYCLE COUNTER START VALUE
CntsStrt «
ª
000000
OUt-ON
OUt-OFF
000000
to
999999
The Cycle Counter returns to this value whenever a Counter Reset occurs.
Non-zero values are normally used for “down counting” applications, but can
also provide an offset value when counting up.
This parameter selects the source from which the Cycle Counter derives
counts. The Timer Reset (t-rESEt) selection generates a count when either a
manual or automatic timer reset occurs (See Module 4 for programming
Automatic Reset). The Input B (INPUt b) selection generates a count each time
Input B is activated. This selection overrides the timer inhibit function of Input
B, when the timer is programmed for Level or Edge-1 operating mode (See
Module 1 for Timer Input Operating Modes).
The User Input (USr1NP) selection generates a count each time the User Input
is activated. When selected as the count source, the User Input can still be set
to perform a User Function described in Module 1. In this case, the Cycle
Counter will count the number of times the selected User Function occurred.
The Output ON/OFF selections generate a count when the Setpoint output
either activates or deactivates. These selections will only generate counts when
an optional Setpoint module is installed.
CYCLE COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP
RStsP-UP
«
ª
NO
NO
YES
The Cycle Counter can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.
8
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY
AND
FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (3-dSPLAY)
PARAMETER MENU
PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)
«
SELsEnb
ª
yES
yES
ProsCodE
NO
ª
The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle between the timer and cycle
counter displays.
ª
«
YES
yES
NO
NO
t-VALUE
C-VALUE
000
0
to
999
The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (Pro Loc) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits only
the Setpoint values and Timer Stop value to be modified, but allows direct
access to these values without having to enter Full Programming mode.
Programming a Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the Pro CodE prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Depending
on the code value, Quick Programming may be accessible before the Pro CodE
prompt appears (see chart).
FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)
RStsEnb
«
both t-C
dSPLAy
The yES selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s). The
shaded selections only appear if the cycle counter is enabled.
USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
KEY IS PRESSED
DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE
d-ScroLL
«
ª
NO
not
yES
______
Pro Loc
NO
The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll between the timer
and cycle counter values. The scroll rate is about every 4 seconds.
0
Full Programming
Immediate Access
1-99
Quick
Programming
After Quick Programming
with correct code entry at
Pro CodE prompt *
100-999
Pro CodE prompt
With correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *
0
Active
1-99
Pro Loc
DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)
d-COLOr
ª
«
rEd
rEd
Not Active
FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS
Programming
Lock
Quick
Programming
No Access
No Access
100-999
Pro CodE prompt
With correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *
0-999
Full Programming
Immediate Access
* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.
6rn
Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)
d-LEVEL
ª
«
1
to
FACtsSEt
«
ª
MO
NO
yES
The yES selection will return the meter to the factory default settings. The
meter will display rESEt and then return to Pro, at which time all settings have
been changed.
Pressing the RST key on power-up will load the factory settings and display
rESEt. This allows operation in the event of a memory failure or corrupted data.
5
5
Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.
9
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SEtPt)
PARAMETER MENU
The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when the optional relay
module is installed in the meter. Some parameters will not appear depending on
the Setpoint Assignment and Setpoint Output Action selected.
SETPOINT OUTPUT TIME-OUT
SPtstOUt «
ª
00.01.00
t-VALUE
C-VALUE
Select the display for Setpoint assignment.
LAtCH
t-OUt
ON-OFF
LAtCH
t-OUt
ON-OFF
OUTPUT ACTIVATES
StOP-t
«
ª
NO
NO
Out-ON
Out-OFF
Stops the Timer when the Setpoint output activates (OUt-ON) or deactivates
(OUt-OFF). Select NO if the output should not affect the Timer Run/Stop status.
The Timer Stop condition is cleared when a Timer Reset occurs, or a Time
Start edge is applied on the Timer input.
This parameter selects the action of the Setpoint output as shown below.
SPT ACTION DESCRIPTION
99.59.99
STOP TIMER
SETPOINT OUTPUT ACTION
SPtsACt «
ª
LAtCH
to
This parameter is only active if the Setpoint Action is set to Timed Output
mode (t-OUt). Enter the time duration the Setpoint Output will remain ON once
it is activated. This value is always entered in minutes, seconds, and hundredths
of seconds format. The maximum value is 99 minutes 59.99 seconds.
SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT
SPtsASN «
ª t-VALUE
00.00.01
OUTPUT DEACTIVATES
At Manual Reset
When Time or Count
Latched Output Mode
(if SPt rSt = YES)
= Setpoint On value
When Time or Count
After Setpoint
Timed Output Mode
= Setpoint On value
Output Time-Out
When Time or Count When Time or Count
On-Off Output Mode
= Setpoint On value = Setpoint Off value
TIMER/COUNTER AUTO RESET
AUtOsrSt
«
ª
NO
NO
Out-ON
Out-OFF
Automatically resets the Setpoint Assigned display value when the Setpoint
Output activates (OUt-ON) or deactivates (OUt-OFF). Select NO if the output should
not cause a display reset.
SETPOINT ON
SPtsON
ª
«
VALUE
VALUE
t-Strt
t-StOP
SETPOINT OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET
SPtsrSt
This parameter determines when the Setpoint output will activate. The output
can activate at a programmed Setpoint Value or can be set to activate when the
Timer starts (t-Strt) or stops (t-StOP).
Selecting VALUE displays a sub-menu where the Setpoint Value is entered. If
the Setpoint is assigned to the Timer, the value is entered in the same display
format as the selected Timer Range.
SPt VAL «
ª 0000100
SPtsOFF «
ª
VALUE
ª
YES
YES
NO
Select YES to have the Setpoint Output deactivate (reset) when the Setpoint
Assigned display resets. Reset can occur by the RST button or the User Input,
if programmed for that function. Select /0 if the Setpoint output should not
reset when the display resets.
0000000 to 9999999
CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/SETPOINT OUTPUT STATE
Ch-COLOr
«
SETPOINT OFF
ª
NO
VALUE
t-Strt
t-StOP
This parameter enables the backlight CUB5T to switch the display color when
the Setpoint output activates. When the output deactivates, the display color will
revert to the normal operating mode color. This parameter is only active for the
backlight version.
The Setpoint Off parameter only appears if the Setpoint Action is set to OnOff Output mode (ON-OFF). In this mode, the Setpoint OFF parameter determines
when the Setpoint Output will deactivate. The output can be programmed to
deactivate at a Setpoint Off Value or can be set to deactivate when the Timer
starts (t-Strt) or stops (t-StOP).
Selecting VALUE displays a sub-menu where the Setpoint Off Value is entered.
If the Setpoint is assigned to the Timer, the value is entered in the same display
format as the selected Timer Range.
SPOF VAL «
ª 0000200
«
NO
YES
SETPOINT OUTPUT POWER-UP STATE
SPtsP-UP
ª
«
OFF
OFF
ON
SAVE
SAVE will restore the output to the same state it was at before the meter was
powered down. ON will activate the output at power up. OFF will deactivate the
0000000 to 9999999
output at power up. This parameter is not active when the Setpoint Action is
selected for timed output mode.
10
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (5-SEriAL)
PARAMETER MENU
Module 5 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the
CUB5T with those of the host computer or other serial device. The Serial Setup
Parameters are only accessible when an optional RS232 or RS485 serial
communications module is installed in the meter.
ABBREVIATED PRINTING
Abbr
ª
This section replaces the bulletin shipped with the RS232 and RS485 serial
communications plug-in cards. Discard the separate bulletin when using those
serial plug-in cards with the CUB5T.
«
ª
9600
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
ª
7-bit
Prnt OPt «
ª
NO
8-bit
7-bit
PARITY BIT
ª
«
NO
Odd
EVEN
DISPLAY
Odd
t-VALUE
C-VALUE
t-Strt
t-StOP
Cnt Strt
SPt ON
SPt OFF
SPt tOUt
This parameter only appears when the Data Bit parameter is set to a 7-bit
data word length. Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial equipment
on the serial link. The meter ignores parity when receiving data and sets the
parity bit for outgoing data. If parity is set to NO, an additional stop bit is used
to force the frame size to 10 bits.
METER ADDRESS
Addr
ª
«
0
to
NO
YES
This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A print request is also referred to as a block print because more than
one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting YES displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the print block. All active parameters entered as YES in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as NO will not be sent.
The “Print All” (Prnt ALL) option selects all meter values for transmitting
(YES), without having to individually select each parameter in the sublist.
Note: Inactive parameters will not be sent regardless of the print option
setting. For example, the Cycle Counter and Cycle Counter Start values will
only be sent when the Cycle Counter is enabled. If disabled, these parameters
are inactive and will not be transmitted. Likewise, the Setpoint parameters will
not be sent unless an optional setpoint card is installed in the meter.
Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.
PAritY
NO
PRINT OPTIONS
DATA BIT
«
YES
19200
38400
Set the baud rate to match that of other serial communications equipment.
Normally, the baud rate is set to the highest value that all of the serial
communications equipment is capable of transmitting and receiving.
dAtA
NO
This parameter determines the formatting of data transmitted from the meter
in response to a Transmit Value command or a Block Print Request. Select NO
for a full print transmission, consisting of the meter address, mnemonics, and
parameter data. Select YES for abbreviated print transmissions, consisting of the
parameter data only. This setting is applied to all the parameters selected in the
PRINT OPTIONS. (Note: If the meter address is 0, the address will not be sent
during a full transmission.)
BAUD RATE
bAUd
«
99
DESCRIPTION
Timer
Cycle Counter
Timer Start
Timer Stop
Counter Start
Setpoint ON
Setpoint OFF
Setpoint Time-out
FACTORY
SETTING
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
MNEMONIC
TMR
CNT
TST
TSP
CST
SPT
SOF
STO
00
Enter the serial node address. With a single unit, an address is not needed
and a value of zero can be used (RS232 applications). Otherwise, with multiple
bussed units, a unique address number must be assigned to each meter. The
node address applies specifically to RS485 applications.
11
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sending Serial Commands and Data
Register Identification Chart
When sending commands to the meter, a string containing at least one
command character must be constructed. A command string consists of a
command character, a value identifier, numerical data (if writing data to the
meter) followed by a command terminator character, * or $.
Command Chart
Command Description
N
T
V
R
P
Notes
Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
one or two digit node address. Not required
when node address = 0.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by a register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
Value Change (write) followed by a register ID character and
numeric data.
Reset a value or the output. Must be followed
Reset
by a register ID character
Block Print Request Initiates a block print output. Registers in the
(read)
print block are selected in Print Options.
Node (meter)
Address Specifier
Applicable
Commands
ID
Value Description MNEMONIC
Transmit Details (T and V)
A
Timer
TMR
T, V, R
7 digit, per Timer Range
B
Cycle Counter
CNT
T, V, R
6 digit
C
Timer Start
TST
T, V
7 digit, per Timer Range
D
Timer Stop
TSP
T, V
7 digit, per Timer Range
E
Counter Start
CST
T, V
6 digit
F
Setpoint ON
(Reset Output)
SPT
T, V, R
per Setpoint Assignment,
same as Timer or Counter
G
Setpoint OFF
SOF
T, V
per Setpoint Assignment,
same as Timer or Counter
H
Setpoint
Time-out
STO
T, V
6 digit, mm.ss.ss format
Command String Construction
Command String Examples:
The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to illegal commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:
1. Node address = 17, Write 350 to the Setpoint On value
String: N17VF350$
2. Node address = 5, Read Timer value, response time of 50 msec min
String: N5TA*
1. The first 2 or 3 characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed
by a 1 or 2 character node address number. The node address number of the
meter is programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node
address itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a register ID character. It
prints all the active selections chosen in the Print Options menu parameter.
4. If constructing a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is
sent next.
5. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters * or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string
until this character is received. See timing diagram figure for differences in
meter response time when using the * and $ terminating characters.
3. Node address = 0, Reset Setpoint output
String: RF*
4. Node address = 31, Request a Block Print Output, response time of 2 msec min
String: N31P$
Transmitting Data to the Meter
Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to Transmit Details listed in the
Register Identification Chart. Leading zeros are ignored. The meter ignores any
decimal point and conforms the number to the appropriate display format. (For
example: The Timer range is set for tenths of a second and 25 is written to the
Timer Start register. The value of the register is now 2.5 seconds. In this case,
write a value of 250 to equal 25.0 seconds).
Note: Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.
Receiving Data From The Meter
data within bytes 9 to 18 is right-aligned with leading spaces for any unfilled
positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with a <CR> and <LF>. After the
last line of a block print, an extra <SP>, <CR> and <LF> are added to provide
separation between the print blocks.
Full Field Transmission
Abbreviated Transmission
Data is transmitted from the meter in response to either a transmit command
(T), a block print request command (P) or a User Input print request. The
response from the meter is either a full field transmission or an abbreviated
transmission, depending on the selection chosen in Module 5.
Byte
Description
Byte
1, 2
2 byte Node Address field [00-99]
1-12
3
<SP> (Space)
4-6
3 byte Register Mnemonic field
7-18
12 byte data field; 9 bytes for number and three bytes for decimal
points
19
<CR> (carriage return)
20
<LF> (line feed)
Description
13
12 byte data field, 9 bytes for number and three bytes for
decimal points
<CR> (carriage return)
14
<LF> (line feed)
15
<SP>* (Space)
16
<CR>* (carriage return)
17
<LF>* (line feed)
21
<SP>* (Space)
* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
22
<CR>* (carriage return)
23
<LF>* (line feed)
The abbreviated response suppresses the node address and register
mnemonic, leaving only the numeric part of the response.
* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted are the meter address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the meter address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic, as shown in the Register
Identification Chart.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field (bytes 7 to 18) is 12
characters long. When a display overflow exists for a requested timer or cycle
counter value, an * (used as an overflow character) replaces a space in byte 7.
Byte 8 is always a space.
The remaining ten positions of this field consist of seven positions for the
requested value with decimal points positioned for the selected timer range. The
Meter Response Examples:
1. Node address = 17, full field response, Cycle Counter = 875
17 CNT
875 <CR><LF>
2. Node address = 0, full field response, Setpoint On value = 250.5
SPT
250.5<CR><LF>
3. Node address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint On value= 250, last line of
block print
250<CR><LF><SP><CR><LF>
12
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Command Response Time
At the beginning of time interval t3, the meter responds with the first
character of the reply. As with t1, the time duration of t3 is dependent on the
number of characters and baud rate of the channel. At the end of t3, the meter is
ready to receive the next command.
The meter can only receive data or transmit data at any one time (half-duplex
operation). During RS232 transmissions, the meter ignores commands while
transmitting data, but instead uses RXD as a busy signal. When sending
commands and data to the meter, a delay must be imposed before sending
another command. This allows enough time for the meter to process the
command and prepare for the next command.
At the start of the time interval t1, the computer program prints or writes the
string to the com port, thus initiating a transmission. During t1, the command
characters are under transmission and at the end of this period, the command
terminating character (* or $) is received by the meter. The time duration of t1
is dependent on the number of characters and baud rate of the channel.
t3 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
The maximum serial throughput of the meter is limited to the sum of the
times t1, t2 and t3.
t1 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
At the start of time interval t2, the meter starts the interpretation of the
command and when complete, performs the command function. This time
interval t2 varies. If no response from the meter is expected, the meter is ready
to accept another command.
If the meter is to reply with data, the time interval t2 is controlled by the use
of the command terminating character. The ‘*’ terminating character results in
a response time of 50 msec. minimum. This allows sufficient time for the
release of the sending driver on the RS485 bus. Terminating the command line
with ‘$’ results in a response time (t2) of 2 msec. minimum. The faster response
time of this terminating character requires that sending drivers release within 2
msec. after the terminating character is received.
Timing Diagram Figure
Communication Format
Start Bit and Data Bits
Data is transferred from the meter through a serial communication channel.
In serial communications, the voltage is switched between a high and low level
at a predetermined rate (baud rate) using ASCII encoding. The receiving device
reads the voltage levels at the same intervals and then translates the switched
levels back to a character. The voltage level conventions depend on the interface
standard. The table lists the voltage levels for each standard.
LOGIC
INTERFACE STATE
RS232*
RS485*
1
mark (idle)
TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V
a-b < -200 mV
0
space (active)
TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V
a-b > +200 mV
Data transmission always begins with the start bit. The start bit signals the
receiving device to prepare for reception of data. One bit period later, the least
significant bit of the ASCII encoded character is transmitted, followed by the
remaining data bits. The receiving device then reads each bit position as they are
transmitted.
Parity Bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The CUB5T meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and
sets the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.
* Voltage levels at the Receiver
Data is transmitted one byte at a time with a variable idle period between
characters (0 to ∞). Each ASCII character is “framed” with a beginning start bit,
an optional parity bit and one or more ending stop bits. The data format and
baud rate must match that of other equipment in order for communication to
take place. The figures list the data formats employed by the meter.
Stop Bit
The last character transmitted is the stop bit. The stop bit provides a single bit
period pause to allow the receiver to prepare to re-synchronize to the start of a
new transmission (start bit of next byte). The receiver then continuously looks
for the occurrence of the start bit. If 7 data bits and no parity is selected, then 2
stop bits are sent from the meter.
Character Frame Figure
13
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
This page intentionally left blank.
14
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Press and hold SEL key to
enter Programming Mode.
CUB5T PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW
15
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Company warrants the products it manufactures against defects in materials and workmanship
for a period limited to two years from the date of shipment, provided the products have been stored,
handled, installed, and used under proper conditions. The Company’s liability under this limited
warranty shall extend only to the repair or replacement of a defective product, at The Company’s
option. The Company disclaims all liability for any affirmation, promise or representation with
respect to the products.
The customer agrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from, defend, and indemnify RLC against
damages, claims, and expenses arising out of subsequent sales of RLC products or products
containing components manufactured by RLC and based upon personal injuries, deaths, property
damage, lost profits, and other matters which Buyer, its employees, or sub-contractors are or may be
to any extent liable, including without limitation penalties imposed by the Consumer Product Safety
Act (P.L. 92-573) and liability imposed upon any person pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act (P.L. 93-637), as now in effect or as amended hereafter.
No warranties expressed or implied are created with respect to The Company’s products except those
expressly contained herein. The Customer acknowledges the disclaimers and limitations contained
herein and relies on no other warranties or affirmations.
Red Lion Controls AP
Red Lion Controls
20 Willow Springs Circle
Red Lion Controls BV
Basicweg 11b
31, Kaki Bukit Road 3,
#06-04/05 TechLink
York PA 17406
NL - 3821 BR Amersfoort
Singapore 417818
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Tel +31 (0) 334 723 225
Tel +65 6744-6613
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
Fax +31 (0) 334 893 793
Fax +65 6743-3360
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Bulletin No. PAXLR-B
Drawing No. LP0564
Released 1/06
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion.net
MODEL PAXLR - PAX LITE RATE METER
z RATE INDICATION
z 6-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED DISPLAYS
z INPUT RATES UP TO 25 KHZ
z ACCEPTS A WIDE VARIETY OF SENSORS
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALING
z PROGRAMMABLE UPDATE TIME
z PROGRAMMABLE DECIMAL POINTS
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
C
U
L
R
US LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
SAFETY SUMMARY
The PAX Lite Rate Meter, Model PAXLR, provides the versatility and
flexibility needed to accommodate virtually any rate measuring application. The
meter has the ability to scale for direct readout in terms of the units being
measured. Whether a machine produces bottles, cloth, wire, or beverage mix,
operation is enhanced when the rate readout is expressed directly in bottles/min.,
feet/min., gallons/min., or whatever units are needed in plant applications.
The PAXLR can accommodate magnetic pickups, logic sensors, and NPN
open collector sensors. The pulses are received and scaled, so the desired
display can be achieved. The meter is programmed through both the front panel
buttons and DIP switches. Once the programming is complete, the front panel
buttons can be disabled by a DIP switch setting.
The meter has been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing to meet CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough, yet reliable application solution.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.
1
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications.
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Setting the Switches . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
3
3
4
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display
Scaling the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4
6
6
7
ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers
PAXL
R0
0
0
R0 - 6 Digit Rate Meter
2
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL/8843/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
1. DISPLAY: 6-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm), 7-segment LED.
Decimal points are programmed by front panel keys.
2. POWER:
AC Power: 115/230 VAC, switch selectable. Allowable power line variation
±10%, 50/60 Hz, 6 VA. @ 100 mA max.
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to input and DC Out/In.
DC Power: 10 to 16 VDC @ 0.1 A max.
3. SENSOR POWER: 9 to 17.5 VDC @ 100 mA max.
4. KEYPAD: 3 programming keys, the T (Down Arrow) key can also function
as the front panel reset button.
5. INPUT: (DIP switch selectable)
Accepts pulses from a variety of sources including NPN-OC, PNP-OC, TTL
Outputs, Magnetic Pickups and all standard Red Lion sensors.
Logic: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current Sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA
Current Sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 8 mA max. @ 30 VDC max.
MAGNETIC PICK-UP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input impedance: 3.9KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak, 30 Vrms
6. INPUT FREQUENCY RANGE:
Max Frequency: 25 KHz
Min Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.01%
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters and
display values.
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0° to 60°C
Storage Temperature: -40° to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
1.0 INSTALLING
THE
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Criterion A
10 V/m
Criterion A 2
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Criterion A 2
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Criterion A
30 A/m
Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. EMI filter placed on the DC power supply, when DC powered: Corcom
#1VB3 or Schaffner #FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000).
10. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage Capacity: 30-14 AWG copper wire.
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
11. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
12. WEIGHT: 12 oz (340 g)
METER
Installation
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of
the bezel. The unit should be installed
fully assembled. Insert the unit into
the panel cutout.
Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
PANEL CUT-OUT
3
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
2.0 SETTING
THE
SWITCHES
SWITCH 3
HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Limits input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths
to 10 msec.
SWITCH 4
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V max.
MAG: 200 mV peak input (must have SRC on).
SWITCH 5
Enable Programming: Enables programming through the front panel buttons.
Disables Programming: Disables the front panel buttons from any
programming changes.
SWITCH 6
Not Active for the Rate Meter
The meter has switches that must be checked and/or changed prior to
applying power. To access the power switch, remove the meter base from the
case by firmly squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This
should lower the latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the
finger tabs). It is recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the
other side latch.
Power Selection Switch
Caution: Insure the AC power selection switch is set for the
proper voltage before powering-up the meter. The meter is shipped
from the factory in the 230 VAC position.
Set-Up DIP Switches
FRONT DISPLAY
Not Active
DIS PGM
MAG
LO Freq.
SRC.
SNK.
A DIP switch is located at the rear of the meter,
and is fully accessible when the unit is in the case.
It is used for the selection of the input parameters
and program disable.
ON
POWER
SELECTION
SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6
Not Active
EN PGM
HI Freq.
LOGIC
Not Active
Not Active
230
115
Factory Setting
SWITCH 1
SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to + 12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
SWITCH 2
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 8 mA max. @ 30 VDC max.
3.0 WIRING
THE
REAR TERMINALS
INPUT SET-UP
DIP SWITCHES
METER
WIRING OVERVIEW
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
4
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power
DC Power
Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC
Terminal 3: +VDC
Terminal 4: COMM
3.2 INPUT WIRING
Magnetic Pickup
Current Sinking Output
AC Inputs From Tach Generators, Etc.
Two Wire Proximity, Current Source
Current Sourcing Output
Interfacing With TTL
Emitter Follower; Current Source
*Switch position is application dependent.
5
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.0 REVIEWING
THE
FRONT BUTTONS
KEY
DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
PAR
Access Programming Mode
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
S
No Function
Increment selected digit of parameter value
T
No Function
Select digit position in parameter value
5.0 SCALING
THE
NOTES:
1. If # of pulses per unit is less than 10, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 10.
2. If # of pulses per unit is less than 1, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 100.
3. If the Display value is raised or lowered, then Input value must be raised
or lowered by the same proportion (i.e. Display value for per hour is
entered by a third less (1200) then Input value is a third less of # of pulses
per unit). The same is true if the Input value is raised or lowered, then
Display value must be raised or lowered by the same proportion.
4. Both values must be greater than 0.0.
To scale the Rate, enter a Scaling Display value with a corresponding Scaling
Input value. These values are internally plotted to a Display value of 0 and Input
value of 0 Hz. A linear relationship is formed between these points to yield a
rate display value that corresponds to the incoming input signal rate. The
location of the scaling point should be near the process end limit for the best
possible accuracy. The PAXLR is capable of showing a rate display value for
any linear process.
SCALING CALCULATION
If a display value versus input signal (in pulses per second) is known, then
those values can be entered into Scaling Display (
) and Scaling Input
(
). No further calculations are needed.
If only the number of pulses per ‘single’ unit (i.e. # of pulses per foot) is
known, then it can be entered as the Scaling Input value and the Scaling Display
value will be entered as the following:
Second
DISPLAY (
)
DISPLAY
METER
RATE SCALING
RATE PER
AND
INPUT (
EXAMPLE:
1. With 15.1 pulses per foot, show feet per minute in tenths.
Scaling Display = 60.0 Scaling Input = 15.1
2. With 0.25 pulses per gallon, show whole gallons per hour. (To have greater
accuracy, multiply both Input and Display values by 10.)
Scaling Display = 36000 Scaling Input = 2.5
)
1
# of pulses per unit
Minute
60
# of pulses per unit
RATE DISPLAY OVERFLOW
Hour
3600
# of pulses per unit
The rate of the input signal along with the programmed scaling values can
cause the calculated rate display to exceed the meter’s 6-digit capacity. If this
occurs, the display will show “
” to indicate an overflow condition.
INPUT FREQUENCY CALCULATION
The meter determines the input frequency by summing the number of falling
edges received during a sample period of time. The sample period begins on the
first falling edge. At this falling edge, the meter starts accumulating time
towards Low Update and High Update values. Also, the meter starts
accumulating the number of falling edges. When the time reaches the Low
Update Time value, the meter looks for one more falling edge to end the sample
period. If a falling edge occurs (before the High Update Time value is reached),
the Rate display will update to the new value and the next sample period will
start on the same edge. If the High Update Time value is reached (without
receiving a falling edge after reaching Low Update Time), then the sample
period will end but the Rate display will be forced to zero. The High Update
Time value must be greater than the Low Update Time value. Both values must
be greater than 0.0. The input frequency calculated during the sample period, is
then shown as a Rate value determined by either scaling method.
6
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE
The Rate Indicator has five programmable parameters which are entered in
the sequence shown above, using the front panel push buttons.
Before programming, refer to the section on Scaling the Meter to determine
the Rate Scaling Display Value and Rate Scaling Input Value to use for the
specific application.
Note: Programming mode can be locked out with the Program Disable DIP
switch. With the switch in the Disabled (up) position the meter will not enter
programming mode. Refer to the section on DIP switch setup.
HIGH UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY ZERO)
«
ª
seconds
The High Update Time is the maximum amount of time before the display is
forced to zero. The High Update Time must be higher than the Low Update
Time and also higher than the desired slowest readable speed (one divided by
pulses per second). The factory setting of 2.0 will force the display to zero for
speeds below 0.5 Hz or one pulse every 2 seconds.
For more details on display updating, refer to Input Frequency Calculation.
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY
Press the PAR key to enter Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
followed by the first programming parameter described below.
PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS
RATE SCALING DISPLAY VALUE
In programming mode, the display alternates between the parameter and the
current selection or value for that parameter. The dual display with arrows is
used below to illustrate the alternating display. The selection choices or value
range for each parameter is shown to the right of the alternating display.
«
ª
to
Enter the desired Rate Display value to be shown for the corresponding Rate
Input value entered below. For more explanation, refer to Rate Scaling.
If a decimal point was selected in the Decimal Position (
) parameter,
it will be displayed at the same position for this parameter value.
DECIMAL POSITION
«
ª
RATE SCALING INPUT VALUE
«
This parameter selects the decimal point position on the display. The
selection does not affect scaling calculations.
Press the arrow keys (S or T) to sequence through the selection list until the
desired selection is shown. Press the PAR key to save the displayed selection
and advance to the next parameter.
ª
The parameters which follow are displayed as a multi-digit numerical values
with one selected digit flashing (initially the far left digit). Press the S (up
arrow) key to increment the value of the selected (flashing) digit. Holding the
S key automatically scrolls the value of the selected digit.
Press the T (down arrow) key to select the next digit position to the right.
Use the S key to increment the value of this digit to the desired number. Press
the T key again to select the next digit to be changed. Holding the T key
automatically scrolls through each digit position.
Repeat the “select and set” sequence until all digits are displaying the desired
numerical value. Press the PAR key to save the displayed value and advance to
the next parameter.
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT
The meter exits Programming Mode when the PAR key is pressed to save the
Rate Scaling Input Value. The meter briefly displays
upon exiting
Programming Mode. All programmed selections are now transferred to the nonvolatile memory and the meter returns to the Rate display.
(If power loss occurs during programming mode, verify parameter changes
and reprogram, if necessary, when power is restored.)
PROGRAMMING MODE TIME OUT
The Programming Mode has an automatic time out feature. If no keypad
activity is detected for approximately 60 seconds, the meter automatically exits
Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
and returns to the Rate
display. When automatic timeout occurs, any changes that were made to the
parameter currently being programmed, will not be saved.
LOW UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY UPDATE)
«
to
to
Enter the Rate Input value that corresponds to the Rate Display value entered
above. This value is always in pulses per second (Hz). For more explanation,
refer to Rate Scaling.
ENTERING NUMERICAL VALUES
ª
to
seconds
FACTORY SETTINGS
The factory settings for the programming parameters are shown above in the
alternating display illustrations. The factory settings can be easily restored by
removing power from the meter, and then pressing and holding the PAR key
while power is reapplied. The meter displays
until the PAR key is
released. The normal power-up sequence then resumes, with the factory settings
loaded and saved in non-volatile memory.
Note: The Program Disable DIP switch must be in the Enabled (down)
position to allow loading factory settings. See section on DIP switch setup.
The Low Update Time is the minimum amount of time between display
updates. The factory setting of 1.0 allows a minimum of one second between
updates. Low values below 0.3 seconds will update the display correctly, but
may cause the display to appear unsteady.
For more details on display updating, refer to Input Frequency Calculation.
7
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Company warrants the products it manufactures against defects in materials and workmanship
for a period limited to two years from the date of shipment, provided the products have been stored,
handled, installed, and used under proper conditions. The Company’s liability under this limited
warranty shall extend only to the repair or replacement of a defective product, at The Company’s
option. The Company disclaims all liability for any affirmation, promise or representation with
respect to the products.
The customer agrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from, defend, and indemnify RLC against
damages, claims, and expenses arising out of subsequent sales of RLC products or products
containing components manufactured by RLC and based upon personal injuries, deaths, property
damage, lost profits, and other matters which Buyer, its employees, or sub-contractors are or may be
to any extent liable, including without limitation penalties imposed by the Consumer Product Safety
Act (P.L. 92-573) and liability imposed upon any person pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act (P.L. 93-637), as now in effect or as amended hereafter.
No warranties expressed or implied are created with respect to The Company’s products except those
expressly contained herein. The Customer acknowledges the disclaimers and limitations contained
herein and relies on no other warranties or affirmations.
Red Lion Controls AP
Red Lion Controls
20 Willow Springs Circle
Red Lion Controls BV
Basicweg 11b
31, Kaki Bukit Road 3,
#06-04/05 TechLink
York PA 17402
NL - 3821 BR Amersfoort
Singapore 417818
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Tel +31 (0) 334 723 225
Tel +65 6744-6613
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
Fax +31 (0) 334 893 793
Fax +65 6743-3360
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Bulletin No. PAXICR-F
Drawing No. LP0548
Released 9/06
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion.net
MODEL PAX - 1/8 DIN DIGITAL INPUT PANEL METERS
z COUNT, DUAL COUNTER, RATE AND SLAVE DISPLAY
z 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE DISPLAY
z VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY
z 10 POINT SCALING FOR NON-LINEAR PROCESSES (PAXI)
z FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Option Card)
z RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/Option Card) (PAXI)
z COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/Option Card) (PAXI)
z BUS CAPABILITIES; DEVICENET, MODBUS, AND PROFIBUS-DP
z CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE (PAXI)
z ETHERNET(W/ External Gateway) (PAXI)
C
U
L
R
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
US LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
through the bus. Additionally, the meters have a feature that allows a remote
computer to directly control the outputs of the meter. With an RS232 or RS485
card installed, it is possible to configure the meter using Red Lion’s Crimson
software. The configuration data can be saved to a file for later recall.
A linear DC output signal is available as an optional Plug-in card for the PAXI
only. The card provides either 20 mA or 10 V signals. The output can be scaled
independent of the input range and can track any of the counter or rate displays.
Once the meters have been initially configured, the parameter list may be
locked out from further modification in its entirety or only the setpoint values
can be made accessible.
The meters have been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing of noise effects to CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.
The PAX Digital Input Panel Meters offer many features and performance
capabilities to suit a wide range of industrial applications. Available in three
different models, PAXC Counter/Dual Counter, PAXR Rate Meter and the PAXI
which offers both counting and rate in the same package. Refer to pages 4 - 5 for
the details on the specific models. The PAXC and PAXR offer only the Setpoint
Option, while the PAXI is the fully featured version offering all the capabilities
as outlined in this bulletin as well as a slave display feature. The optional plugin output cards allow the opportunity to configure the meter for present
applications, while providing easy upgrades for future needs.
The meters employ a bright 0.56" LED display. The meters are available with
a red sunlight readable or standard green LED display. The intensity of the
display can be adjusted from dark room applications up to sunlight readable,
making it ideal for viewing in bright light applications.
The meters accept digital inputs from a variety of sources including switch
contacts, outputs from CMOS or TTL circuits, magnetic pickups and all
standard RLC sensors. The meter can accept directional, uni-directional or
Quadrature signals simultaneously. The maximum input signal varies up to 34
KHz depending on the count mode and function configurations programmed.
Each input signal can be independently scaled to various process values.
The Rate Meters provide a MAX and MIN reading memory with
programmable capture time. The capture time is used to prevent detection of false
max or min readings which may occur during start-up or unusual process events.
The meters have four setpoint outputs, implemented on Plug-in option cards.
The Plug-in cards provide dual FORM-C relays (5A), quad FORM-A (3A), or
either quad sinking or quad sourcing open collector logic outputs. The setpoint
alarms can be configured to suit a variety of control and alarm requirements.
Communication and Bus Capabilities are also available as option cards for
the PAXI only. These include RS232, RS485, Modbus, DeviceNet, and
Profibus-DP. Readout values and setpoint alarm values can be controlled
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this meter to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the meter.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.
1
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications. . . . . . . .
PAXC Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAXR Rate Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAXI Counter/Rate Meter . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Plug-In Output Cards . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Jumper and DIP Switches .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
7
Installing Plug-In Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display. . . 11
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Factory Service Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Parameter Value Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Programming Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers
0
PAX
0
C - Counter/Dual Counter
R - Rate Meter
I - Counter/Dual Counter/
Rate Meter/Slave Display
0 - Red, Sunlight Readable Display
1 - Green Display
0 - 85 to 250 VAC
1 - 11 to 36 VDC, 24 VAC
Option Card and Accessories Part Numbers
TYPE
MODEL NO.
PAXCDS
Optional
Plug-In
Cards
PAXCDC
Accessories
Accessories
SFCRD*
ICM8
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBERS
Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card
PAXCDS10
Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card
PAXCDS20
Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card
PAXCDS30
Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card
PAXCDS40
RS485 Serial Communications Card with Terminal Block
PAXCDC10
Extended RS485 Serial Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector
PAXCDC1C
RS232 Serial Communications Card with Terminal Block
PAXCDC20
Extended RS232 Serial Communications Card with 9 Pin D Connector
PAXCDC2C
DeviceNet Communications Card
PAXCDC30
Modbus Communications Card
PAXCDC40
Extended Modbus Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector
PAXCDC4C
Profibus-DP Communications Card
PAXCDC50
Analog Output Card
PAXCDL10
Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP
SFCRD200
Communication Gateway
ICM80000
*Crimson software is available for free download from http://www.redlion.net/
Shaded areas are only available for the PAXI
2
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephones ENV 50204 Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ±5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
1. DISPLAY: 6 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) red sunlight readable or standard green
LED
2. POWER:
AC Versions:
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 18 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs. (300 V working)
DC Versions:
DC Power: 11 to 36 VDC, 14 W
(derate operating temperature to 40° C if operating <15 VDC and three
plug-in option cards are installed)
AC Power: 24 VAC, ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs (50 V working).
3. SENSOR POWER: 12 VDC, ±10%, 100 mA max. Short circuit protected
4. KEYPAD: 3 programmable function keys, 5 keys total
5. USER INPUTS: Three programmable user inputs
Max. Continuous Input: 30 VDC
Isolation To Sensor Input Commons: Not isolated
Logic State: Jumper selectable for sink/source logic
INPUT STATE
SINKING INPUTS
Ω pull-up to +12 V
5.1 KΩ
SOURCING INPUTS
Ω pull-down
5.1 KΩ
Active
VIN < 0.9 VDC
VIN > 3.6 VDC
Inactive
VIN > 3.6 VDC
VIN < 0.9 VDC
Note:
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines section of the bulletin for additional
information.
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C (0 to 45°C with all three plug-in
cards installed)
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity noncondensing
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
10. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
11. WEIGHT: 10.1 oz. (286 g)
Response Time: 6 msec. typical; function dependent. Certain resets, stores
and inhibits respond within 25 µsec if an edge occurs with the associated
counter or within 6 msec if no count edge occurs with the associated
counter. These functions include
,
,
,
,
,
, and
. Once activated, all functions are latched for
50 msec min. to 100 msec max. After that period, another edge/level may
be recognized.
6. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters and
display values.
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/8843/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529
3
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL PAXC - 1/8 DIN COUNTER
z 6-DIGIT LED DISPLAY (Alternating 8 digits for counting)
z DUAL COUNT QUAD INPUTS
z UP TO 3 COUNT DISPLAYS
z SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Plug-in card)
PAXC SPECIFICATIONS
ANNUNCIATORS:
A - Counter A
B - Counter B
C - Counter C
- Upper significant digit display of counter
SP1 - setpoint 1 output state
SP2 - setpoint 2 output state
SP3 - setpoint 3 output state
SP4 - setpoint 4 output state
MAXIMUM SIGNAL FREQUENCIES:
To determine the maximum frequency for the input(s), first answer the
questions with a yes (Y) or no (N). Next determine the Count Mode to be
used for the counter(s). If dual counters are used with different Count Modes,
then the lowest frequency applies to both counters.
FUNCTION QUESTIONS Single: Counter A or B Dual: Counter A & B
Are any setpoints used?
N
Is Counter C used?
N
COUNT MODE
(Values are in KHz)
(Values are in KHz)
Count x1
34
25
15
13
12
9
Count x2
17
13
9
7
9
7
5
4
Quadrature x1
22
19
12
10
7
6
4
3.5
Quadrature x2
Quadrature x4
17
8
13
6
9
4
7
3
7
6
4
3.5
N
Y
Y
N
18
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Maximum display: 8 digits: ± 99999999 (greater than 6 digits display
Alternates between high order and low order.)
INPUTS A and B:
DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources including
switch contacts, TTL outputs, magnetic pickups and all standard RLC
sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
Filter: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec. minimum.
DUAL COUNT MODES:
When any dual count mode is used, then User Inputs 1 and/or 2 will
accept the second signal of each signal pair. The user inputs do not have
the Logic/Mag, HI/LO Freq, and Sink/Source input setup switches. The
user inputs are inherently a logic input with no low frequency filtering.
Any mechanical contacts used for these inputs in a dual count mode
must be debounced externally. The user input may only be selected for
sink/source by the User Jumper placement.
7.5
Notes:
1. Counter Modes are explained in the Module 1 programming section.
2. Listed values are with frequency DIP switch set on HI frequency.
MODEL PAXR - 1/8 DIN RATE METER
z 5-DIGIT LED DISPLAY
z RATE INDICATION
z MINIMUM/MAXIMUM RATE DISPLAYS
z SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Plug-in card)
PAXR SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT A:
DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources including
TTL outputs, magnetic pickups and all standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input impedance: 3.9 KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak, 30 Vrms
ANNUNCIATORS:
- Rate
- Maximum (High) Rate
- Minimum (Low) Rate
SP1 - setpoint 1 output state
SP2 - setpoint 2 output state
SP3 - setpoint 3 output state
SP4 - setpoint 4 output state
RATE DISPLAY:
Accuracy: ±0.01%
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Maximum Frequency: 34 KHz
Maximum Display: 5 Digits: 99999
Adjustable Display (low) Update: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds
Over Range Display: “
”
4
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL PAXI - 1/8 DIN COUNTER/RATE METER
z COUNT, RATE AND SLAVE DISPLAY
z 6-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE DISPLAY
z VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY
z 10 POINT SCALING (FOR NON-LINEAR PROCESSES)
z FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)
z RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/OPTION CARD)
z COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)
z BUS CAPABILITIES; DEVICENET, MODBUS, AND PROFIBUS-DP
z CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
PAXI SPECIFICATIONS
MAXIMUM SIGNAL FREQUENCIES TABLE
To determine the maximum frequency for the input(s), first answer the
questions with a yes (Y) or no (N). Next determine the Count Mode to be used
for the counter(s). If dual counters are used with different Count Modes, then
the lowest frequency applies to both counters.
FUNCTION QUESTIONS Single: Counter A or B (with/without rate) or Rate only Dual: Counter A & B or Rate not assigned to active single counter
Are any setpoints used?
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Is Prescaler Output used?
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Is Counter C used?
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
COUNT MODE
(Values are in KHz)
(Values are in KHz)
Count x1
34
25
21
17
18
15
13
Count x2
17
13
16
12
9
7
Quadrature x1
22
19
20
17
12
10
Quadrature x2
17
13
16
12
9
7
8
(Values are in KHz)
(Values are in KHz)
11
13
12
13
11
9
8
7
9*
7*
9*
7*
5*
11
10
7*
6*
6*
5*
4*
6
7*
6*
6*
5*
4*
3.5 *
Quadrature x4
8
6
8
6
4
3
4
3
Rate Only
34
N/A
21
N/A
34
N/A
21
N/A
7.5
9
7
4*
5*
4*
3.5 *
3.5 *
3*
3.5 *
3*
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Counter Modes are explained in the Module 1 programming section.
If using Rate with single counter with direction or quadrature, assign it to Input A for the listed frequency.
* Double the listed value for Rate frequency.
Listed values are with frequency DIP switch set on HI frequency.
Derate listed frequencies by 20% during serial communications. (Placing a 5 msec. delay between serial characters will eliminate the derating.)
INPUTS A and B:
DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources
including switch contacts, TTL outputs, magnetic pickups and all
standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
Filter: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec. minimum.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input impedance: 3.9 KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak, 30 Vrms
DUAL COUNT MODES:
When any dual count mode is used, then User Inputs 1 and/or 2 will
accept the second signal of each signal pair. The user inputs do not have
the Logic/Mag, HI/LO Freq, and Sink/Source input setup switches. The
user inputs are inherently a logic input with no low frequency filtering.
Any mechanical contacts used for these inputs in a dual count mode
must be debounced externally. The user input may only be selected for
sink/source by the User Jumper placement.
PRESCALER OUTPUT:
NPN Open Collector: ISNK = 100 mA max. @ VOL = 1 VDC max. VOH = 30
VDC max. With duty cycle of 25% min. and 50 % max.
ANNUNCIATORS:
A - Counter A
B - Counter B
C - Counter C
- Rate
- Maximum (High) Rate
- Minimum (Low) Rate
- Upper significant digit display of counter
SP1 - setpoint 1 output state
SP2 - setpoint 2 output state
SP3 - setpoint 3 output state
SP4 - setpoint 4 output state
RATE DISPLAY:
Accuracy: ±0.01%
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Maximum Frequency: see Max Signal Frequencies Table.
Maximum Display: 5 Digits: 99999
Adjustable Display (low) Update: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds
Over Range Display: “
”
COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Maximum display: 8 digits: ± 99999999 (greater than 6 digits display
Alternates between high order and low order.)
5
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
OPTIONAL PLUG-IN OUTPUT CARDS
SETPOINT CARDS (PAXCDS)
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.
The PAX and MPAX series has 4 available setpoint alarm output plug-in
cards. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. (Logic state of the
outputs can be reversed in the programming.) These plug-in cards include:
PAXCDS10 - Dual Relay, FORM-C, Normally open & closed
PAXCDS20 - Quad Relay, FORM-A, Normally open only
PAXCDS30 - Isolated quad sinking NPN open collector
PAXCDS40 - Isolated quad sourcing PNP open collector
Adding Option Cards
The PAX and MPAX series meters can be fitted with up to three optional plugin cards. The details for each plug-in card can be reviewed in the specification
section below. Only one card from each function type can be installed at one time.
The function types include Setpoint Alarms (PAXCDS), Communications
(PAXCDC), and Analog Output (PAXCDL). The plug-in cards can be installed
initially or at a later date.
DUAL RELAY CARD
Type: Two FORM-C relays
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 2000 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 240 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load),
1/8 HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with both relays energized not to exceed 5 amps
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
Response Time: 5 msec. nominal with 3 msec. nominal release
Time Accuracy: Counter = ± 0.01% + 10 msec.
Rate = ± 0.01% + 20 msec.
PAXI COMMUNICATION CARDS (PAXCDC)
A variety of communication protocols are available for the PAX and MPAX
series. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. When programming
the unit via Crimson, a Windows® based program, the RS232 or RS485 Cards
must be used.
PAXCDC10 - RS485 Serial (Terminal)
PAXCDC1C - RS485 Serial (Connector)
PAXCDC20 - RS232 Serial (Terminal)
PAXCDC2C - RS232 Serial (Connector)
PAXCDC30 - DeviceNet
PAXCDC40 - Modbus (Terminal)
PAXCDC4C - Modbus (Connector)
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP
QUAD RELAY CARD
Type: Four FORM-A relays
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 2300 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 250 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 3 amps @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load), 1/10
HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with all four relays energized not to exceed 4 amps
Life Expectancy: 100K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
Response Time: 5 msec. nominal with 3 msec. nominal release
Time Accuracy: Counter = ± 0.01% + 10 msec.
Rate = ± 0.01% + 20 msec.
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 or RS232
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Data: 7/8 bits
Baud: 300 to 19,200
Parity: no, odd or even
Bus Address: Selectable 0 to 99, Max. 32 meters per line (RS485)
Transmit Delay: Selectable for 2 to 50 msec or 50 to 100 msec (RS485)
DEVICENET™ CARD
Compatibility: Group 2 Server Only, not UCMM capable
Baud Rates: 12 5Kbaud, 250 Kbaud, and 500 Kbaud
Bus Interface: Phillips 82C250 or equivalent with MIS wiring protection per
DeviceNet™ Volume I Section 10.2.2.
Node Isolation: Bus powered, isolated node
Host Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between DeviceNet™
and meter input common.
QUAD SINKING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sinking NPN transistors.
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: 100 mA max @ VSAT = 0.7 V max. VMAX = 30 V
Response Time: Counter = 25 µsec; Rate = Low Update time
Time Accuracy: Counter = ± 0.01% + 10 msec.
Rate = ± 0.01% + 20 msec.
MODBUS CARD
Type: RS485; RTU and ASCII MODBUS modes
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 minute.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not isolated from all other commons.
Baud Rates: 300 to 38400.
Data: 7/8 bits
Parity: No, Odd, or Even
Addresses: 1 to 247.
Transmit Delay: Programmable; See Transmit Delay explanation.
QUAD SOURCING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sourcing PNP transistors.
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: Internal supply: 24 VDC ± 10% , 30 mA max. total
External supply: 30 VDC max., 100 mA max. each output
Response Time: Counter = 25 µsec; Rate = Low Update time
Time Accuracy: Counter = ± 0.01% + 10 msec.
Rate = ± 0.01% + 20 msec.
PROFIBUS-DP CARD
Fieldbus Type: Profibus-DP as per EN 50170, implemented with Siemens
SPC3 ASIC
Conformance: PNO Certified Profibus-DP Slave Device
Baud Rates: Automatic baud rate detection in the range 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud
Station Address: 0 to 126, set by the master over the network. Address stored
in non-volatile memory.
Connection: 9-pin Female D-Sub connector
Network Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between Profibus
network and sensor and user input commons. Not isolated from all other
commons.
PAXI LINEAR DC OUTPUT (PAXCDL)
Either a 0(4)-20 mA or 0-10 V retransmitted linear DC output is available
from the analog output plug-in card. The programmable output low and high
scaling can be based on various display values. Reverse slope output is possible
by reversing the scaling point positions.
PAXCDL10 - Retransmitted Analog Output Card
ANALOG OUTPUT CARD
Types: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Accuracy: 0.17% of FS (18 to 28°C); 0.4% of FS (0 to 50°C)
Resolution: 1/3500
Compliance: 10 VDC: 10 KΩ load min., 20 mA: 500 Ω load max.
Response Time: 50 msec. max., 10 msec. typ.
PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Crimson is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the PAX
meter from a PC. Crimson offers standard drop-down menu commands, that
make it easy to program the PAX meter. The PAX program can then be saved in
a PC file for future use. A PAX serial plug-in card is required to program the
meter using the software.
6
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
1.0 INSTALLING
METER
THE
Installation
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel
latch should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a
proper seal, tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel
(Torque to approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert
the unit into the panel cutout.
Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near devices
that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate
the aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
PANEL CUT-OUT
2.0 SETTING
THE
JUMPER
AND
DIP SWITCHES
Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards. Remove
all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing inside of
the meter.
To access the jumper and switches, remove the meter base from the meter
case by firmly squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This
should lower the latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the
finger tabs). It is recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the
other side latch.
2.1 SETTING THE JUMPER
2.2 SETTING THE INPUT DIP SWITCHES
The meter has one jumper for user input logic. When using the user inputs
this jumper must be set before applying power. The Main Circuit Board figure
shows the location of the jumper and DIP switch.
The user input jumper determines signal logic for the user inputs, when they
are used with user functions or for input signal direction. All user inputs are set
by this jumper.
The meter has six DIP switches for Input A and Input B terminal set-up that
must be set before applying power. NOTE: The PAXR only uses switches 1-3.
6
5
4
3
Input B LO Freq.
Input B SRC.
Input B MAG.
Input A LO Freq.
Main
Circuit
Board
Input A SRC.
Input A MAG.
ON
2
1
HI Freq.
SNK.
Logic
HI Freq.
SNK.
Logic
Factory Setting
SWITCHES 3 and 6
INPUT SET-UP
DIP SWITCHES
1 2 3 4 5 6
HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Adds a damping capacitor for switch contact bounce. Also
limits input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec.
USER
INPUT
JUMPER
SWITCHES 2 and 5
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
SRC
SNK
SWITCHES 1 and 4
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
MAG: 200 mV peak input (must also have SRC on). Not recommended with
counting applications.
7
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
To Install:
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased optional cards that perform
specific functions. These cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter. The
Plug-in cards have many unique functions when used with the PAX. The
literature that comes with these cards should be discarded, unless it specifically
states in the Plug-in Card literature that the information applies to the PAX.
Note: The PAXC and PAXR only use the setpoint option card.
1. With the case open, locate the Plug-in card connector for the card type to be
installed. The types are keyed by position with different main circuit board
connector locations. When installing the card, hold the meter by the rear
terminals and not by the front display board.*
2. Install the Plug-in card by aligning the card terminals with the slot bay in the
rear cover. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the tab on the Plug-in
card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
3. Slide the meter base back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully
into the case.
4. Apply the Plug-in card label to the bottom side of the meter in the designated
area. Do Not Cover the vents on the top surface of the meter. The surface of
the case must be clean for the label to adhere properly.
CAUTION: The Plug-in card and main circuit board contain
static sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal
object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean
workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or
other contaminants that may contact the cards can adversely
affect circuit operation.
TOP VIEW
Quad Sourcing Open Collector Output Card Supply Select
* If installing the Quad sourcing Plug-in Card (PAXCDS40), set the
jumper for internal or external supply operation before continuing.
8
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.0 WIRING
THE
METER
WIRING OVERVIEW
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screwclamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
4.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power
DC Power
Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC
Terminal 1: +VDC
Terminal 2: -VDC
4.2 USER INPUT WIRING
Before connecting the wires, the User Input Logic Jumper should be verified for proper position. If User Input 1
and/or 2 are wired for quadrature or directional counting, an additional switching device should not be connected to that
User Input terminal. Only the appropriate User Input terminal has to be wired.
Sinking Logic
Terminals 7-9
Terminal 10
}
Connect external switching device between the
appropriate User Input terminal and User Comm.
The user inputs of the meter are
internally pulled up to +12 V with 5.1 K
resistance. The input is active when it is
pulled low (<0 .9 V).
Sourcing Logic
Terminals 7-9:
+ VDC through external switching device
Terminal 10:
-VDC through external switching device
The user inputs of the meter are internally
pulled down to 0 V with 5.1 K resistance.
The input is active when a voltage greater
than 3.6 VDC is applied.
9
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.3 INPUT WIRING
CAUTION: Sensor input common is NOT isolated from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the sensor input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential
of the user input common with respect to earth ground; and the common of the isolated plug-in cards with respect to input common.
If you are wiring Input B, connect signal to Terminal 6 instead of 5, and set DIP switches 4, 5, and 6 to the positions shown for 1, 2, and 3.
Magnetic Pickup
Input A
AC Inputs From Tach Generators, Etc.
Two Wire Proximity, Current Source
Input A
Input A
Current Sinking Output
Input A
Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink
Interfacing With TTL
Current Sourcing Output
Input A
Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Source
Input A
Current Sink Output; Quad/Direction
Single Counter A
If using single Counter B, then wire signal to 6,
and Quad/Direction to 8. Set switch positions
4, 5, and 6 as shown for 1, 2, and 3.
Emitter Follower; Current Source
Input A
Input A
Current Sink Output; Quad/Direction
Input A
Current Sink Output; Quad/Direction
Counter A
& Rate B
User Input Jumper
in Sink Position
Counter A &
Counter B
User Input Jumper
in Sink Position
Switch position is application dependent.
Shaded areas not recommended for counting applications.
4.4 SETPOINT (ALARMS) WIRING
SOURCING OUTPUT LOGIC CARD
SETPOINT PLUG-IN CARD TERMINALS
SINKING OUTPUT LOGIC CARD
10
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.5 PAXI SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
RS232 Communications
RS485 Communications
The RS485 communication standard allows the connection of up to 32
devices on a single pair of wires, distances up to 4,000 ft. and data rates as high
as 10M baud (the PAX is limited to 19.2k baud). The same pair of wires is used
to both transmit and receive data. RS485 is therefore always half-duplex, that is,
data cannot be received and transmitted simultaneously.
RECEIVING DEVICE
PAX METER
+5V
Transmit
Enable
Terminal Block Connection Figure
33K
12
13
B(-)
A(+)
33K
14
COMM. *
15 NC
* OPTIONAL
Extended Comms Connection Figure
Terminal Block Connection Figure
RS232 is intended to allow two devices to communicate over distances up to
50 feet. Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) transmits data on the Transmitted Data
(TXD) line and receives data on the Received Data (RXD) line. Data Computer
Equipment (DCE) receives data on the TXD line and transmits data on the RXD
line. The PAX emulates a DTE. If the other device connected to the meter also
emulates a DTE, the TXD and RXD lines must be interchanged for
communications to take place. This is known as a null modem connection. Most
printers emulate a DCE device while most computers emulate a DTE device.
Some devices cannot accept more than two or three characters in succession
without a pause in between. In these cases, the meter employs a busy function.
As the meter begins to transmit data, the RXD line (RS232) is monitored to
determine if the receiving device is “busy”. The receiving device asserts that it
is busy by setting the RXD line to a space condition (logic 0). The meter then
suspends transmission until the RXD line is released by the receiving device.
Extended Comms Connection Figure
4.7 PAXI PRESCALER OUTPUT WIRING
4.6 PAXI ANALOG OUTPUT WIRING
ANALOG OPTION CARD FIELD TERMINALS
5.0 REVIEWING
THE
FRONT BUTTONS
AND
DISPLAY
KEY
DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
DSP
Index display through the selected displays.
Quit programming and return to Display Mode
PAR
Access Programming Mode
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
F1
Function key 1; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 1 **
Increment selected parameter value or selections
F2
Function key 2; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 2 **
Decrement selected parameter value or selections
RST
Reset (Function key) ***
Advances digit location in parameter values
* Counters B, and C are locked out in Factory Settings (PAXC and PAXI only).
** Factory setting for the F1, and F2 keys is NO mode.
(Reset Display).
*** Factory setting for the RST key is
11
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU
Shaded areas represent program access that is model dependent.
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR KEY)
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (DSP KEY or at
The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters can be
programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by pressing the
PAR key. If it is not accessible then it is locked by either a security code, or a
hardware lock.
Two types of programming modes are available. Quick Programming Mode
permits only certain parameters to be viewed and/or modified. All meter
functions continue to operate except the front panel keys change to
Programming Mode Operations. Quick Programming Mode is configured in
Module 3. Full Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and
modified. In this mode, incoming counts may not be recognized correctly, the
front panel keys change to Programming Mode Operations and certain user
input functions are disabled. Throughout this document, Programming Mode
(without Quick in front) always refers to “Full” Programming.
The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the DSP key (from anywhere
in the Programming Mode) or the PAR key (with
displayed). This will
commit any stored parameter changes to memory and return the meter to the
Display Mode. If a parameter was just changed, the PAR key should be pressed
to store the change before pressing the DSP key. (If power loss occurs before
returning to the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)
PAR KEY)
MODULE ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)
FACTORY SETTINGS
PROGRAMMING TIPS
It is recommended to start with Module 1 for counting and Module 4 for rate.
If lost or confused while programming, press the DSP key and start over. When
programming is complete, it is recommended to record the parameter
programming on the Parameter User Chart and lock out parameter
programming with a user input or lock-out code.
The Programming Menu is organized into nine modules. These modules group
together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate between
and the present module. The arrow keys (F1S and F2T) are used to select
the desired module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the PAR key.
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 9. This is a good
starting point for programming problems. Most parameters can be left at their
Factory Settings without affecting basic start-up. These parameters are
identified throughout the module explanations.
MODULE MENU (PAR KEY)
ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The PAR key is pressed to advance to a particular parameter
to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding parameters.
After completing a module, the display will return to
. Programming may
continue by accessing additional modules.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The arrow keys (F1S and F2T) are used
to move through the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the PAR key,
stores and activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter
to the next parameter.
For numeric values, the RST key may be used to select a specific digit to be
changed. Once a digit is selected, the arrow keys are used to increment or
decrement that digit to the desired number.
«
Parameter
ª
Selection/Value
Factory Settings are shown.
6.1 MODULE 1 - COUNT A & B INPUT PARAMETERS (
PAXC & I
)
PARAMETER MENU
x = Counter A or Counter B
Module 1 is the programming for Counter A, Counter B and the Prescaler Output. Counter B parameters follow the Prescaler parameters. For
maximum input frequency, the counters should be set to mode NONE and the Prescaler to NO when they are not in use. When set to NONE
or NO, the remaining related parameters are not accessible. A corresponding annunciator indicates the counter being shown in the Display
Mode. An Exchange Parameter Lists feature for scale factors and count load values is explained in Module 2.
12
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
COUNTER A OPERATING MODE
«
NONE
ª
cnt
COUNTER A SCALE MULTIPLIER *
«
cntud dcntud quAd1 quAd2
ª
quAd4 dquAd1 dquAd2 cnt2 cntud2 dctud2
The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale multiplier and the scale
factor to obtain the desired process value. A scale multiplier of 1 will result in
only the scale factor affecting the display. (Details on scaling calculations are
explained at the end of this section.)
Select the operating mode for Counter A.
SELECTION
MODE
DESCRIPTION
Does not count.
NONE
cnt
cntud
Count X1
Adds Input A falling edge.
Count X1
w/direction
Adds Input A falling edge if Input B is high.
Subtracts Input A falling edge if Input B is low.
dcntud
Count X1
w/direction
Adds Input A falling edge if User 1 is high. Subtracts
Input A falling edge if User 1 is low.
quAd1
Quad X1
Adds Input A rising edge when Input B is high.
Subtracts Input A falling edge when Input B is high.
quAd2
Quad X2
Adds Input A rising edge when Input B is high and
Input A falling edge when Input B is low. Subtracts
Input A falling edge when Input B is high and Input A
rising edge when Input B is low.
quAd4
Quad X4
COUNTER A COUNT LOAD VALUE *
«
ª
When reset to count load action is selected, Counter A will reset to this value.
COUNTER A RESET POWER-UP *
«
Adds Input A rising edge when Input B is high, Input
A falling edge when Input B is low, Input B rising
edge when Input A is low, and Input B falling edge
when Input A is high. Subtracts Input A falling edge
when Input B is high, Input A rising edge when Input
B is low, Input B rising edge when Input A is high,
and Input B falling edge when Input A is low.
dquAd1
Quad X1
Adds Input A rising edge when User 1 is high.
Subtracts Input A falling edge when User 1 is high.
dquAd2
Quad X2
Adds Input A rising edge when User 1 is high and
Input A falling edge when User 1 is low. Subtracts
Input A falling edge when User 1 is high and Input A
rising edge when User 1 is low.
cnt2
cntud2
Count X2
Adds Input A rising and falling edges.
Count X2
w/direction
Adds Input A rising and falling edges if Input B is
high. Subtracts Input A rising and falling edge if
Input B is low.
dctud2
Count X2
w/direction
Adds Input A rising and falling edges if User 1 is
high. Subtracts Input A rising and falling edge if
User 1 is low.
to
ª
Counter A may be programmed to reset at each meter power-up.
PAXI: PRESCALER OUTPUT ENABLE *
«
ª
This enables the prescaler output. The prescaler output is useful for providing
a lower frequency scaled pulse train to a PLC or another external counter. On
each falling edge of Input A, the prescaler output register increments by the
prescaler scale value (
). When the register equals or exceeds 1.0000, a
pulse is output and the register is lowered by 1.0000. The prescaler register is
reset to zero whenever Counter A is reset (except for Setpoint Counter Auto
Reset). (See Prescaler Output Figure.)
PAXI: PRESCALER SCALE VALUE *
COUNTER A RESET ACTION
«
«
to
ª
ª
When Counter A is reset, it returns to zero or Counter A count load value.
This reset action affects all Counter A resets, except the Setpoint Counter Auto
Reset in Module 6.
The prescaler output frequency is the Input A frequency times the prescaler
scale value.
COUNTER A DECIMAL POSITION
«
ª
This selects the decimal point position for Counter A and any setpoint value
assigned to Counter A. The selection will also affect Counter A scale factor
calculations.
COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR
«
to
* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.
ª
The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale factor and the scale
multiplier to obtain the desired process value. A scale factor of 1.00000 will
result in the display of the actual number of input counts. (Details on scaling
calculations are explained at the end of this section.)
13
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
COUNTER B OPERATING MODE
«
NONE
ª
cnt
COUNTER B RESET POWER-UP *
«
dcntud dquAd1
ª
dquAd2 cnt2 dctud2
Counter B may be programmed to reset at each meter power-up.
Select the operating mode for Counter B.
SELECTION
MODE
DESCRIPTION
* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.
Does not count.
NONE
cnt
dcntud
Count X1
Adds Input B falling edge.
Count X1
w/direction
Adds Input B falling edge if User 2 is high. Subtracts
Input B falling edge if User 2 is low.
dquAd1
Quad X1
Adds Input B rising edge when User 2 is high.
Subtracts Input B falling edge when User 2 is high.
dquAd2
Quad X2
Adds Input B rising edge when User 2 is high and
Input B falling edge when User 2 is low. Subtracts
Input B falling edge when User 2 is high and Input B
rising edge when User 2 is low.
cnt2
dctud2
Count X2
Adds Input B rising and falling edges.
Count X2
w/direction
Adds Input B rising and falling edges if User 2 is
high. Subtracts Input B rising and falling edge if
User 2 is low.
8 DIGIT COUNT VALUES
Any counter display value below -99999 or above 999999 (less decimal
point) will consist of a two part display. This display alternates between the
least 6 significant digits and the remaining most significant digits beginning
with “ ” in the display. If the display exceeds ± 99999999 the display will roll
to zero and continue counting. Outputs cannot be set to counter values above 6
digits. The annunciator, indicating the counter being displayed, will flash when
the value is above 6 digits.
SCALING CALCULATIONS
Each counter has the ability to scale an input signal to a desired display
value. This is accomplished by the counter mode (x- ), scale factor (x
),
scale multiplier (x
) and decimal point (x
). The scale factor is
calculated using:
COUNTER B RESET ACTION
SF (x
«
ª
Where:
When Counter B is reset, it returns to zero or Counter B count load value.
This reset action affects all Counter B resets, except the Setpoint Counter Auto
Reset Action in Module 6.
Desired
Display
Decimal DDD
COUNTER B DECIMAL POSITION
«
ª
This selects the decimal point position for Counter B and any setpoint value
assigned to Counter B. The selection will also affect Counter B scale factor
calculations.
Counter Decimal Selection
1
0
None
10
0.0
Tenths
100
0.00
Hundredths
1000
0.000
Thousandths
10000
0.0000
Ten Thousandths
100000
0.00000
Hundred Thousandths
1. Show feet to the hundredths (0.00) with 100 pulses per foot:
Scale Factor would be 100 / (100 x 1 x 1) = 1
(In this case, the scale multiplier and counter mode factor are 1)
2. Show feet with 120 pulses per foot: Scale Factor would be 1 / (120 x 1 x 1)
= 0.0083333. (In this case, the scale multiplier of 0.01 could be used: 1 / (120
x 1 x 0.01) = 0.83333 or show to hundredths (0.00): 100 / (120 x 1 x 1) =
0.8333.)
The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale factor and the scale
multiplier to obtain the desired process value. A scale factor of 1.00000 will
result in the display of the actual number of input counts. (Details on scaling
calculations are explained at the end of this section.)
General Rules on Scaling
COUNTER B SCALE MULTIPLIER *
1. It is recommended that, the scale factor be as close as possible to, but not
exceeding 1.00000. This can be accomplished by increasing or decreasing
the counter decimal point position, using the scale multiplier, or selecting a
different count mode.
2. To double the number of pulses per unit, use counter modes direction X2 or
quad X2. To increase it by four times, use counter mode quad X4. Using
these modes will decrease the maximum input frequency.
3. A scale factor greater than 1.00000 will cause Counter display rounding. In
this case, digit jumps could be caused by the internal count register rounding
the display. The precision of a counter application cannot be improved by
using a scale factor greater than 1. 00000.
4. The number of pulses per single unit must be greater than or equal to the
DDD value for the scale factor to be less than or equal to one.
5. Lowering the scale factor can be accomplished by lowering the counter
decimal position. (Example: 100 (Hundredths)/10 pulses = 10.000 lowering
to 10 (Tenths)/10 = 1.000.)
«
ª
The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale multiplier and the scale
factor to obtain the desired process value. A scale multiplier of 1 will result in
only the scale factor affecting the display. (Details on scaling calculations are
explained at the end of this section.)
COUNTER B COUNT LOAD VALUE *
ª
x
Example:
to
ª
«
Desired Display Decimal DDD
(Number of pulses per ‘single’ unit x CM x SM)
Number of pulses per ‘single’ unit: pulses per unit generated by the
process (i.e. # of pulses per foot)
CM: Counter Mode(x- ) times factor of the mode 1,2 or 4.
SM: Scale Multiplier (x
) selection of 1, 0.1 or 0.01.
COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR
«
)=
to
When reset to count load action is selected, Counter B will reset to this value.
14
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.2 MODULE 2 - USER INPUT AND FRONT PANEL FUNCTION KEY
PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
EXCHANGE PARAMETER LISTS
Module 2 is the programming for rear terminal user inputs and front panel
function keys.
Three rear terminal user inputs are individually programmable to perform
specific meter control functions. While in the Display Mode, the function is
executed when the user input transitions to the active state. (Refer to the user
input specifications for active state response times.) Certain user input functions
are disabled in “full” Programming Mode.
Three front panel function F1, F2 and RST keys are also individually
programmable to perform specific meter control functions. While in the Display
Mode, the primary function is executed when the key is pressed. Holding the
F1 and F2 function keys for three seconds executes a secondary function. It is
possible to program a secondary function without a primary function. The front
panel key functions are disabled in both Programming Modes.
In most cases, if more than one user input and/or function key is programmed
for the same function, the maintained (level trigger) actions will be performed
while at least one of those user inputs or function keys are activated. The
momentary (edge trigger) actions are performed every time any of those user
inputs or function keys transition to the active state. All functions are available
to both user inputs and function keys.
Some of the user functions have a sublist of parameters. The sublist is
accessed when PAR is pressed at the listed function. The function will only be
performed for the parameters entered as
. If a user input or function key is
configured for a function with a sublist, then that sublist will need to be scrolled
through each time to access the following user inputs or function keys
parameters.
«
ª
Shaded parameters do not apply to the PAXR.
PAXI: PRINT REQUEST
PAXI: PRINT REQUEST AND RESET DISPLAYS
«
Programming Mode is locked-out, as long as activated
(maintained action). In Module 3, certain parameters can
be setup where they are still accessible during
Programming Mode Lockout. A security code can be configured to allow
complete programming access during user input lockout. Function keys should
not be programmed for
.
«
ª
DISPLAY
A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
HI
LO
When activated (momentary action), the display advances to the next display
that is not locked out from the Display Mode.
ª
ª
The meter issues a block print through the serial port when activated just like
the Print Request function. In addition, when activated (momentary action), the
meter performs a reset of the displays configured as
. The print aspect of this
action only functions when a serial communication plug-in card is installed.
The reset action functions regardless.
ª
«
«
ª
«
RESET DISPLAY
ª
The meter issues a block print through the serial port when activated. The
data transmitted during the print request is configured in Module 7. If the user
input is still active after the transmission is complete (about 100 msec.), an
additional transmission will occur. Only one transmission will take place with
each function key depression. This selection will only function when a serial
communications Plug-in card is installed in the meter.
PROGRAMMING MODE LOCK-OUT
ADVANCE DISPLAY
«
ª
«
ª
ª
ª
Two lists of values are available for
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
. The two lists are named
and
.
If a user input is used to select the list then
is selected when the user
input is not active and and
is selected when the user input is active,
(maintained action). If a front panel key is used to select the list then the list will
toggle for each key press, (momentary action). The meter will suspend ALL
operations for approximately 1 msec. while the new values are loaded. The
display will only indicate which list is active when the list is changed or when
entering any Programming Mode.
To program the values for
and
, first complete the
programming of all the parameters. Exit programming and switch to the other
list. Re-enter programming and enter the values for
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
. If any other parameters are
changed then the other list values must be reprogrammed.
With this selection, NO function is performed. This is the factory setting for
all user inputs and function keys except the Reset (RST) Key.
NOTE: When a user input is used to accept a quad or directional input
signal, then that user input should be programmed for NO function.
«
«
«
NO FUNCTION
ª
«
DESCRIPTION
Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Maximum
Minimum
FACTORY
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
«
ª
When activated (momentary action), the shown display is reset. This is the
factory setting for the Reset (RST) Key.
15
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MAINTAINED (LEVEL) RESET AND INHIBIT
«
DEACTIVATE SETPOINT MAINTAINED (LEVEL)
«
«
ª
ª
ª
The meter performs a reset and inhibits the displays configured as
long as activated (maintained action).
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4
«
DESCRIPTION
, as
ª
DISPLAY
NO
NO
MOMENTARY (EDGE) RESET
DESCRIPTION
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4
ª
DISPLAY
NO
NO
SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4
INHIBIT
«
ª
A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
HI
LO
«
SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4
STORE DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Maximum
Minimum
«
ª
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
1
2
3
4
FACTORY
NO
NO
NO
NO
CHANGE DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL
«
«
ª
The meter holds (freeze) the displays configured as
, as long as activated
(maintained action). Internally the counters and max. and min. values continue to
update.
A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
HI
LO
NO
NO
NO
NO
When activated (momentary action), the meter activates the setpoints
configured as
. This action only functions with a Setpoint card installed.
ª
DISPLAY
FACTORY
ª
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
ª
1
2
3
4
«
, as long as activated
FACTORY
Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Maximum
Minimum
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
ACTIVATE SETPOINT MOMENTARY (EDGE)
ª
The meter inhibits the displays configured as
(maintained action).
«
ª
FACTORY
Maximum
Minimum
DESCRIPTION
NO
NO
NO
NO
The meter activates the setpoints configured as
, as long as activated
(maintained action). This action only functions with a Setpoint card installed.
When activated (momentary action), the meter resets the displays configured as
. (Momentary resets improve max. input frequencies over maintained resets.)
DISPLAY
FACTORY
ª
ª
«
1
2
3
4
«
«
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
ACTIVATE SETPOINT MAINTAINED (LEVEL)
«
DISPLAY
«
ª
DISPLAY
PAXR: MOMENTARY (EDGE) RESET
HI
LO
NO
NO
NO
NO
The meter holds the state of the setpoints configured as
, as long as
activated (maintained action). This action only functions with a Setpoint plug-in
card installed.
FACTORY
Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Maximum
Minimum
FACTORY
ª
When activated (momentary action), the meter resets the displays configured as
. (Momentary resets improve max. input frequencies over maintained resets.)
A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
HI
LO
1
2
3
4
«
ª
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
HOLD SETPOINT STATE
«
ª
«
SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4
«
NO
NO
NO
NO
When activated (momentary action), the meter deactivates the setpoints
configured as
. This action only functions with a Setpoint card installed.
FACTORY
Maximum
Minimum
HI
LO
FACTORY
ª
ª
The meter performs a reset and inhibits the displays configured as
long as activated (maintained action).
1
2
3
4
«
«
ª
DESCRIPTION
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
DEACTIVATE SETPOINT MOMENTARY (EDGE)
PAXR: MAINTAINED (LEVEL) RESET AND INHIBIT
DISPLAY
ª
The meter deactivates the setpoints configured as
, as long as activated
(maintained action). This action only functions with a Setpoint card installed.
, as
FACTORY
Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Maximum
Minimum
A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
HI
LO
«
«
ª
When activated (momentary action), the display intensity changes to the next
intensity level (of 4). The four levels correspond to Display Intensity Level
(
) settings of 0, 3, 8 & 15. The intensity level, when changed via the User
Input/ Function Key, is not retained at power-down, unless Quick Programming
or Full Programming mode is entered and exited. The meter will power-up at the
last saved intensity level.
FACTORY
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
16
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY
AND PROGRAM
PARAMETERS
LOCK-OUT
(
)
PARAMETER MENU
x = Counter A , Counter B, and then Counter C
n = Setpoints 1 to 4
Shaded areas represent program access that is model dependent.
Module 3 is the programming for Display lock-out and “Full” and “Quick”
Program lock-out.
When in the Display Mode, the available displays can be read consecutively
by repeatedly pressing the DSP key. An annunciator indicates the display being
shown. These displays can be locked from being visible. It is recommended that
the display be set to
when the corresponding function is not used.
SELECTION
SETPOINT 1 to 4 ACCESS LOCK-OUT *
«
ª
«
ª
«
ª
«
ª
The setpoint displays can be programmed for
,
, or
(See the
following table). Accessible only with the Setpoint Plug-in card installed.
DESCRIPTION
Visible in Display Mode
COUNT LOAD A B C ACCESS LOCK-OUT *
Not visible in Display Mode
“Full” Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and
modified. This Programming Mode can be locked with a security code and/or
user input. When locked and the PAR key is pressed, the meter enters a Quick
Programming Mode. In this mode, setpoint, count load and scale factor values
can still be read and/or changed per the selections below. The Display Intensity
Level (
) parameter also appears whenever Quick Programming Mode is
enabled, and the security code is greater than zero.
SELECTION
«
ª
«
ª
Visible and changeable in Quick Programming Mode
Not visible in Quick Programming Mode
ª
«
«
ª
,
, or
.
to
Entry of a non-zero value will cause the prompt
to appear when trying to
access the “Full” Programming Mode. Access will only be allowed after entering
a matching security code or universal code of
. With this lock-out, a user input
would not have to be configured for Program Lock-out. However, this lock-out is
overridden by an inactive user input configured for Program Lock-out.
«
ª
.
ª
«
ª
«
ª
, or
SECURITY CODE *
«
«
«
,
The Scale Factor values can be programmed for
COUNTER A B C DISPLAY LOCK-OUT *
RATE DISPLAY LOCK-OUT *
MAX. MIN. DISPLAY LOCK-OUT *
ª
ª
SCALE FACTOR A B C ACCESS LOCK-OUT *
Visible but not changeable in Quick Programming Mode
ª
ª
These displays can be programmed for
DESCRIPTION
«
«
«
ª
These displays can be programmed for
or
* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.
.
Shaded areas are model dependent.
PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS
SECURITY
CODE
USER INPUT
CONFIGURED
USER INPUT
STATE
WHEN PAR KEY IS
PRESSED
0
not
————
“Full” Programming
>0
not
“FULL” PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS
Immediate access.
————
Quick Programming w/Display Intensity
After Quick Programming with correct code # at
prompt.
>0
Active
Quick Programming w/Display Intensity
After Quick Programming with correct code # at
prompt.
>0
Not Active
“Full” Programming
Immediate access.
0
Active
Quick Programming
No access
0
Not Active
“Full” Programming
Immediate access.
Throughout this document, Programming Mode (without Quick in front) always refers to “Full” Programming (all meter parameters are accessible).
17
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.4 MODULE 4 - RATE INPUT PARAMETERS (
) - PAXR & I
PARAMETER MENU
Non-linear Application – Up to 10 Scaling Points
Module 4 is the programming for the Rate parameters. For maximum input
frequency, Rate assignment should be set to
when not in use. When set to
, the remaining related parameters are not accessible. The Rate value is
shown with an annunciator of ‘ ’ in the Display Mode.
Note: For PAXR,
is actually
on the unit’s display and
is
actually
on the unit’s display.
Non-linear processes may utilize up to nine segments (ten scaling points) to
provide a piece-wise linear approximation representing the non-linear function.
The Rate display will be linear throughout each individual segment (i.e.
between sequential scaling points). Thus, the greater the number of segments,
the greater the conformity accuracy. Several linearization equations are
available in the SFPAX software.
PAXI: RATE ASSIGNMENT
About Scaling Points
«
Each Scaling Point is specified by two programmable parameters: A desired
Rate Display Value (
) and a corresponding Rate Input Value (
).
Scaling points are entered sequentially in ascending order of Rate Input Value.
Two scaling points must be programmed to define the upper and lower
endpoints of the first linear segment. Setting
, automatically factory sets
the first scaling point to 0.0 for typical single segment, zero based applications.
When multiple segments are used, the upper scaling point for a given segment
becomes the lower scaling point for the next sequential segment. Thus, for each
additional segment used, only one additional scaling point must be programmed.
The following chart shows the Scaling Points, the corresponding Parameter
mnemonics, and the Factory Default Settings for each point.
ª
For measuring the rate (speed) of pulses on Input A, select
. For Input
B select
. This assignment is independent of the counting modes.
LOW UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY UPDATE) *
«
ª
to
seconds
The Low Update Time is the minimum amount of time between display
updates for the Rate display. Values of 0.1 and 0.2 seconds will update the
display correctly but may cause the display to appear unsteady. The factory
setting of 1.0 will update the display every second minimum.
SEGMENT
HIGH UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY ZERO) *
«
ª
to
seconds
The High Update Time is the maximum amount of time before the Rate
display is forced to zero. (For more explanation, refer to Input Frequency
Calculation.) The High Update Time must be higher than the Low Update Time
and higher than the desired slowest readable speed (one divided by pulses per
second). The factory setting of 2.0, will force the display to zero for speeds
below 0.5 Hz or a pulse every 2 seconds.
DISPLAY
DEFAULT
INPUT
PARAMETER
INPUT
DEFAULT
1
000000
00000.0
1
2
001000
01000.0
2
3
002000
02000.0
3
4
003000
03000.0
4
5
004000
04000.0
5
6
005000
05000.0
6
7
006000
06000.0
7
8
007000
07000.0
8
9
008000
08000.0
9
10
009000
09000.0
«
ª
to
Confirm the Rate Display Value for the first Scaling Point is 0. This parameter
is automatically set to 0 and does not appear when
. (See Note)
«
ª
This selects the decimal point position for Rate, Minimum and Maximum
rate displays and any setpoint value assigned to these displays. This parameter
does not affect rate scaling calculations.
PAXI: RATE INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1
«
ª
PAXI: LINEARIZER SEGMENTS
ª
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
PAXI: RATE DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1
RATE DECIMAL POSITION
«
SCALING
POINT
to
Confirm the Rate Input Value for the first Scaling Point is 0.0. (See Note)
Note: For all linear and most non-linear applications, the Scaling Point 1
parameters (
and
) should be set to 0 and 0.0 respectively.
Consult the factory before using any non-zero values for Scaling Point 1. These
parameters are automatically set to 0 and do not appear when
.
to
This parameter specifies the number of linear segments used for the Rate
Scaling function. Each linear segment has two scaling points which define the
upper and lower endpoints of the segment. The number of segments used
depends on the linearity of the process and the display accuracy required as
described below.
RATE DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2
«
Linear Application – 2 Scaling Points
ª
Linear processes use a single segment (two scaling points) to provide a linear
Rate display from 0 up to the maximum input frequency. For typical zero based
frequency measurements (0 Hz = 0 on display), leave
(factory setting).
For non-zero based 2 scaling point applications, set
, to enter both the
zero segment (
&
) and segment 1 (
&
).
to
Enter the desired Rate Display Value for the second Scaling Point by using
the arrow keys.
* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.
18
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
RATE INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2
«
RATE SCALING
To scale the Rate, enter a Scaling Display value with a corresponding Scaling
Input value. (The Display and Input values can be entered by Key-in or Applied
Methods.) These values are internally plotted to a Display value of 0 and Input
value of 0 Hz. A linear relationship is formed between these points to yield a
rate display value that corresponds to the incoming input signal rate. The PAXI
and PAXR are capable of showing a rate display value for any linear process.
to
ª
Enter the corresponding Rate Input Value for the second Scaling Point by
using the arrow keys. Rate Input values for scaling points can be entered by
using the Key-in or the Applied method described below.
KEY-IN SCALING METHOD CALCULATION
Key-in Method:
If a display value versus input signal (in pulses per second) is known, then
those values can be entered into Scaling Display (
x) and Scaling Input
(
x). No further calculations are needed.
If only the number of pulses per ‘single’ unit (i.e. # of pulses per foot) is
known, then it can be entered as the Scaling Input value and the Scaling Display
value will be entered as the following:
Enter the Rate Input value (
) that corresponds to the entered Rate
Display value (
) by pressing the F1 or F2 keys. This value is always in
pulses per second (Hz).
Applied Method:
Apply an external rate signal to the appropriate input terminals. At the Rate
Input Value (
) press and hold the F1 and F2 keys at the same time. The
applied input frequency (in Hz) will appear on the display. (To verify correct
reading wait for at least the length of the Low Update Time. Then press and
hold the F1 and F2 keys at the same time again. The new value should be ±
0.1% of the previous entered value.) Press PAR to enter the displayed
frequency as the Rate Input value. To prevent the displayed value from being
entered, press DSP. This will take the meter out of Programming Mode and the
previous Rate Input value will remain.
RATE PER
Second
«
ª
Rounding values other than one round the Rate display to the nearest
increment selected (e.g. rounding of ‘5’ causes 122 to round to 120 and 123 to
round to 125). Rounding starts at the least significant digit of the Rate display.
to
ª
Minute
60
# of pulses per unit
Hour
3600
# of pulses per unit
The meter determines the input frequency by summing the number of falling
edges received during a sample period of time. The sample period begins on the
first falling edge. At this falling edge, the meter starts accumulating time
towards Low Update and High Update values. Also, the meter starts
accumulating the number of falling edges. When the time reaches the Low
Update Time value, the meter looks for one more falling edge to end the sample
period. If a falling edge occurs (before the High Update Time value is reached),
the Rate display will update to the new value and the next sample period will
start on the same edge. If the High Update Time value is reached (without
receiving a falling edge after reaching Low Update Time), then the sample
period will end but the Rate display will be forced to zero. The High Update
Time value must be greater than the Low Update Time value. Both values must
be greater than 0.0. The input frequency calculated during the sample period, is
then shown as a Rate value determined by either scaling method.
MAXIMUM CAPTURE DELAY TIME *
to
x)
INPUT FREQUENCY CALCULATION
The Low Cut Out value forces the Rate display to zero when the Rate display
falls below the value entered.
«
INPUT (
# of pulses per unit
EXAMPLE:
1. With 15.1 pulses per foot, show feet per minute in tenths. Scaling Display
= 60.0 Scaling Input = 15.1.
2. With 0.25 pulses per gallon, show whole gallons per hour. (To have greater
accuracy, multiply both Input and Display values by 10.) Scaling Display
= 36000 Scaling Input = 2.5.
LOW CUT OUT *
ª
x)
1
NOTES:
1. If # of pulse per unit is less than 10, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 10.
2. If # of pulse per unit is less than 1, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 100.
3. If the Display value is raised or lowered, then Input value must be raised
or lowered by the same proportion (i.e. Display value for per hour is
entered by a third less (1200) then Input value is a third less of # of pulses
per unit). The same is true if the Input value is raised or lowered, then
Display value must be raised or lowered by the same proportion.
4. Both values must be greater than 0.0.
RATE DISPLAY ROUND *
«
DISPLAY (
seconds
When the Rate value is above the present Maximum rate value for the
entered amount of time, the meter will capture that Rate value as the new
Maximum value. A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short
spikes. Maximum detection will only function if Rate is assigned to Input A or
B. The Maximum rate value is shown with an annunciator of ‘ ’ in the display
and will continue to function independent of being displayed.
MINIMUM CAPTURE DELAY TIME *
«
ª
to
seconds
When the Rate value is below the present Minimum rate value for the entered
amount of time, the meter will capture that Rate value as the new Minimum
value. A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short spikes.
Minimum detection will only function if Rate is assigned to Input A or B. The
Minimum rate value is shown with an annunciator of ‘ ’ in the display and will
continue to function independent of being displayed.
RATE DISPLAY EXCEEDED
If the rate of the input signal causes a display that exceeds the capacity of the
Rate display (5 digits, 99999), then the display will indicate an overflow
condition by showing “
”. During this overflow condition, the Minimum
and Maximum rate values will stay at their values even during resets.
* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.
19
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.5 MODULE 5 - COUNTER C INPUT PARAMETERS (
PAXC & I
PARAMETER MENU
Module 5 is the programming for Counter C. For maximum input frequency,
the counter operating mode should be set to
when not in use. When set to
the remaining related parameters are not accessible. The C annunciator
indicates that Counter C is being shown in the Display Mode. An Exchange
Parameter List feature for scale factor and count load values is explained in
Module 2.
COUNTER C SCALE FACTOR
«
The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale factor and the scale
multiplier to obtain the desired process value. A scale factor of 1.00000 will
result in the display of the actual number of input counts. For (Numeric
transmissions) modes of operation, the input signal is scaled directly. For
and
modes of operation, the math is performed on the input signals
and then the result is scaled. To achieve correct results, both Input A and Input
B must provide the same amount of pulses per unit of measurement. (Details on
scaling calculations are explained at the end of Module 1 section.)
«
ª
Select the operating mode for Counter C.
Add Ab
Sub Ab
Does not count.
COUNTER C SCALE MULTIPLIER
Counter C counts the incoming pulses from Counter A input
as per Counter A mode of operation. The signal is scaled only
according to Counter C parameters.
«
Counter C counts the incoming pulses from Counter A and B
inputs as per Counter A and B modes of operation. The result
is scaled only according to Counter C parameters. (Example:
If Counter A is set for Count X1 mode and Counter B is set
for Count X2 mode, then Counter C will increment by 1 for
each pulse received on Input A and increment by 2 for each
pulse received on Input B less any effects of scaling.)
ª
The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale multiplier and the scale
factor to obtain the desired process value. A scale multiplier of 1 will result in
only the scale factor affecting the display. (Details on scaling calculations are
explained at the end of Module 1 section.)
Counter C counts the incoming pulses from Counter A and B
inputs as per Counter A and B modes of operation and
subtracts the B counts from the A counts. The result is scaled
only according to Counter C parameters. (Example: If
Counter A is set for Count X1 mode and Counter B is set for
Count X2 mode, then Counter C will increment by 1 for each
pulse received on Input A and decrement by 2 for each pulse
received on Input B less any effects of scaling.)
COUNTER C COUNT LOAD VALUE
«
ª
Note: When using Add Ab or Sub Ab, Counter A, B and C must all be reset
at the same time for the math to be performed on the display values.
SLAVE
to
ª
COUNTER C OPERATING MODE *
NONE
A
)
to
When reset to count load action is selected, Counter C will reset to this value.
See Serial Communications for details.
(PAXI only)
COUNTER C RESET POWER-UP *
«
ª
COUNTER C RESET ACTION
Counter C may be programmed to reset at each meter power-up.
«
ª
When Counter C is reset, it returns to zero or Counter C count load value.
This reset action affects all Counter C resets, except the Setpoint Counter Auto
Reset Action in Module 6.
* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.
COUNTER C DECIMAL POSITION
«
ª
This selects the decimal point position for Counter C and any setpoint value
assigned to Counter C. The selection will also affect Counter C scale factor
calculations.
20
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.6 MODULE 6 - SETPOINT (ALARM) PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
Module 6 is the programming for the setpoint (alarms) output parameters. To have setpoint outputs, a setpoint Plug-in card needs to
be installed into the PAX (see Ordering Information). Depending on the card installed, there will be two or four setpoint outputs
available. This section replaces the bulletin that comes with the setpoint plug-in card. Please discard the separate literature when using
the Plug-in card with the Digital PAX. For maximum input frequency, unused Setpoints should be configured for
action.
The setpoint assignment and the setpoint action determine certain setpoint feature availability. The chart below illustrates this.
SETPOINT PARAMETER AVAILABILITY
RATE
PARAMETER
LIt-n
OUt-n
SUP-n
SP-n
trC-n
tyP-n
Stb-n
HyS-n
tOFF-n
tON-n
tOUt-n
AUtO-n
rSd-n
rSAS-n
rSAE-n
DESCRIPTION
COUNTER
TIMED OUT
BOUNDARY
LATCH
TIMED OUT
BOUNDARY
LATCH
Annunciators
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Output Logic
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Power Up State
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setpoint Value
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setpoint Tracking
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Boundary Type
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Standby Operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Setpoint Hysteresis
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Setpoint Off Delay
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Setpoint On Delay
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Setpoint Time Out
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Counter Auto Reset
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Reset With Display Reset
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Reset When SPn+1 Activates
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Reset When SPn+1 Deactivates
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
SETPOINT OUTPUT LOGIC *
SETPOINT SELECT
«
«
ª
ª
Select a setpoint (alarm output) to open the remaining module menu. (The
“ ” in the following parameters will reflect the chosen setpoint number.) After
the chosen setpoint is programmed, the display will default to
. Select
the next setpoint to be programmed and continue the sequence for each setpoint.
Pressing PAR at
will exit Module 6.
Normal ( ) turns the output “on” when activated and “off” when
deactivated. Reverse ( ) turns the output “off” when activated and “on” when
deactivated.
SETPOINT POWER UP STATE *
«
SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS*
«
ª
ª
will restore the output to the same state it was at before the meter was
powered down.
will activate the output at power up.
will deactivate the
output at power up.
disables the display of the setpoint annunciator. Normal ( ) displays
the corresponding setpoint annunciator of an “on” alarm output. Reverse ( )
displays the corresponding setpoint annunciator of an “off” alarm output.
flashes the display and the corresponding setpoint annunciator of an
“on” alarm output.
* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.
21
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SETPOINT ACTION
SETPOINT STANDBY OPERATION *
«
«
ª
ª
: When not using a setpoint, it should be set to
Selecting
will disable low acting setpoints at a power up until the display
value crosses into the alarm “off” area. Once in the alarm “off” area, the
setpoint will function according to the configured setpoint parameters.
(no action).
For Counter Assignments:
LAtCH
bOUNd
tOUt
With Latch action, the setpoint output activates when the count
value equals the setpoint value. The output remains active until
reset. This action is not associated with Boundary types.
With boundary action, the setpoint output activates when the
= ) or less than
count value is greater than or equal to (for
= ) the setpoint value. The setpoint output
or equal to (for
= )
will deactivate when the count value is less than (for
= ) the setpoint value.
or greater than (for
With Timed Out action, the setpoint output activates when the
count value equals the setpoint value and deactivates after the
Time Out value. This action is not associated with Boundary
types.
PAXI & R: SETPOINT HYSTERESIS *
«
ª
The hysteresis value is added to (for
= ), or subtracted from (for
=
), the setpoint value to determine at what value to deactivate the associated
setpoint output. Hysteresis is only available for setpoints assigned to the Rate
with boundary action.
For Rate Assignments:
LAtCH
bOUNd
tOUt
to
With Latch action, the setpoint output activates when the rate
value is equal to the setpoint value. The setpoint output remains
active until reset. If after reset, the rate value is greater than or
= ) or less than or equal to (for
= ) the
equal to (for
setpoint value, the output will reactivate.
With Boundary action, the setpoint output activates when the
= ) or less than
rate value is greater than or equal to (for
= ) the setpoint value. The setpoint output
or equal to (for
will deactivate (Auto reset) as determined by the hysteresis
value.
With Timed Out action, the setpoint output cycles when the rate
= ) or less than or
value is greater than or equal to (for
= ) the setpoint value. The Setpoint Time Out
equal to (for
) and Setpoint On Delay (
) values determine the
(
cycling times.
PAXI & R: SETPOINT OFF DELAY *
«
to
ª
This is the amount of time the Rate display must meet the setpoint
deactivation requirements (below hysteresis for high acting and above
hysteresis for low acting) before the setpoint’s output deactivates.
PAXI & R: SETPOINT ON DELAY *
«
«
seconds
This is the amount of time the Rate display must meet the setpoint activation
requirements (below setpoint for
= and above setpoint for
= ) before
the setpoint’s output activates. If the Rate Setpoint Action is Timed Out, this is
the amount of time the output is off during the on / off output cycling.
ª
Select the display that the setpoint is to be assigned.
SETPOINT TIME OUT *
SETPOINT VALUE
ª
to
ª
PAXC & I: SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT
«
seconds
«
to
to
ª
seconds
If the setpoint action is Timed Out and the setpoint is assigned to Rate, then
this is the amount of time the output is on during the on / off output cycling. If
the setpoint action is Timed Out and the setpoint is assigned to Count, then this
is the amount of time the output will activate once the count value equals the
setpoint value.
Enter the desired setpoint value. Setpoint values can also be entered in the
Quick Programming Mode when the setpoint is configured as
in Module 3.
(See Module 2 for Exchange Parameter Lists explanation.)
SETPOINT TRACKING *
«
PAXC & I: COUNTER AUTO RESET *
ª
«
ª
If a selection other than NO is chosen, then the value of the setpoint being
programmed (“n”) will track the entered selection’s value. Tracking means that
when the selection’s value is changed (in the Quick Programming Mode), the
“n” setpoint value will also change (or follow) by the same amount.
ZErOAS CLdAS
ZErOAE CLdAE
This automatically resets the display value of the Setpoint Assignment (
) counter each time the setpoint value is reached. This reset may be different
than the Counter’s Reset Action (x
) in Module 1 or 5.
SELECTION
SETPOINT BOUNDARY TYPE
NO
ZErOAS
CLdAS
ZErOAE
CLdAE
«
ª
activates the output when the assigned display value (
) equals or
exceeds the setpoint value.
activates the setpoint when the assigned display
value is less than or equal to the setpoint.
ACTION
No auto reset.
Reset to zero at the start of output activation.
Reset to count load value at the start of output activation.
Reset to zero at the end of output activation. (
action only).
Reset to count load value at the end of output activation. (
action only).
* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.
22
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PAXC & I: SETPOINT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET *
PAXC & I: SETPOINT RESET WHEN SPn+1 DEACTIVATES *
«
«
ª
ª
Select
, so the setpoint output will deactivate (reset) when the Setpoint
Assignment (
) counter display resets. The only exception is if the
assigned counter is reset by a Counter Auto reset generated by another setpoint.
Select
, so the setpoint output will deactivate (reset) when SPn +1
activates and then times out (deactivates). This function may only be used if the
SPn+1 is programmed for Setpoint Action of
. (Example SP1 deactivates
when SP2 is activated and then times out.) The last setpoint will wrap around
to the first.
PAXC & I: SETPOINT RESET WHEN SPn+1 ACTIVATES *
«
ª
* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.
Select
, so the setpoint output will deactivate (reset) when SPn +1
activates. (Example: SP1 deactivates when SP2 activates and SP4 when SP1
activates.) The last setpoint will wrap around to the first.
PAXR & I: SETPOINT (ALARM) FIGURES FOR RATE
(For Reverse Action, The Alarm state is opposite.)
LOW ACTING WITH NO DELAY
LOW ACTING WITH DELAY
HIGH ACTING WITH NO DELAY
HIGH ACTING WITH DELAY
HIGH ACTING WITH TIMEOUT
LOW ACTING WITH TIMEOUT
23
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.7 MODULE 7 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (
PAXI ONLY
)
PARAMETER MENU
METER UNIT ADDRESS
Module 7 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the PAXI
with those of the host computer or other serial device, such as a terminal or
printer. This programming module can only be accessed if an RS232 or RS485
Serial Communications card is installed.
This section also includes an explanation of the commands and formatting
required for communicating with the PAXI. In order to establish serial
communications, the user must have host software that can send and receive
ASCII characters. Red Lion's SFPAX software can be used for configuring the
PAXI (See Ordering Information). For serial hardware and wiring details, refer
to section 4.5 Serial Communication Wiring.
«
to
ª
Enter the serial meter (node) address. With a single unit, an address is not
needed and a value of zero can be used. With multiple units (RS485
applications), a unique 2 digit address number must be assigned to each meter.
ABBREVIATED PRINTING
This section replaces the bulletin shipped with the RS232 and RS485 serial
communications plug-in cards. Discard the separate bulletin when using those
serial plug-in cards with the PAXI. Also, this section does NOT apply to the
DeviceNet, Modbus, or Profibus-DP communication cards. For details on the
operation of the Fieldbus cards, refer to the bulletin shipped with each card.
«
ª
Select
for full print or Command T transmissions (meter address,
parameter data and mnemonics) or
for abbreviated print transmissions
(parameter data only). This will affect all the parameters selected in the print
options. (If the meter address is 00, it will not be sent during a full
transmission.)
BAUD RATE
«
ª
PRINT OPTIONS
Set the baud rate to match the other serial communications equipment on the
serial link. Normally, the baud rate is set to the highest value that all the serial
equipment are capable of transmitting and receiving.
«
ª
- Enters the sub-menu to select the meter parameters to appear during a
print request. For each parameter in the sub-menu, select
for that parameter
information to be sent during a print request or
for that parameter
information not to be sent. A print request is sometimes referred to as a block
print because more than one parameter information (meter address, parameter
data and mnemonics) can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
DATA BIT
«
ª
Select either 7 or 8 bit data word lengths. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.
PARAMETER
A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
rAtE
HILO
SCFAC
CNtLd
SPNt
PARITY BIT
«
ª
Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial communications equipment
on the serial link. The meter ignores the parity when receiving data and sets the
parity bit for outgoing data. If no parity is selected with 7 bit word length, an
additional stop bit is used to force the frame size to 10 bits.
DESCRIPTION
Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Rate
Max. & Min.
A B C Scale Factors
A B C Count Load
1 2 3 4 Setpoints *
FACTORY
yES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
MNEMONIC
CTA
CTB
CTC
RTE
MIN MAX
SFA SFB SFC
LDA LDB LDC
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
*Setpoints are plug-in card dependent.
24
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SENDING SERIAL COMMANDS AND DATA
Command String Examples:
1. Address = 17, Write 350 to Setpoint 1
String: N17VM350$
2. Address = 5, Read Count A value, response time of 50 - 100 msec. min.
String: N05TA*
3. Address = 0, Reset Setpoint 4 output
String: RS*
When sending commands to the meter, a string containing at least one
command character must be constructed. A command string consists of a
command character, a value identifier, numerical data (if writing data to the
meter) followed by a the command terminator character * or $. The <CR> is
also available as a terminator when Counter C is in the SLAVE mode.
Command Chart
Command Description
Notes
Transmitting Data To the Meter
Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
Node (Meter) Address
two digit node address. Not required when
Specifier
address = 00.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
Value change (write) followed by register ID character and numeric
data.
Reset a register or output. Must be followed
Reset
by register ID character
Block Print Request
Initiates a block print output. Registers are
(read)
defined in programming.
N
T
V
R
P
Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to Transmit Details listed in
the Register Identification Chart. Leading zeros are ignored. Negative numbers
must have a minus sign. The meter ignores any decimal point and conforms the
number to the scaled resolution. (ie. The meter’s scaled decimal point position
is set for 0.0 and 25 is written to a register. The value of the register is now 2.5.
In this case, write a value of 250 to equal 25.0).
Note: Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.
Transmitting Data From the Meter
Data is transmitted from the meter in response to either a transmit command
(T), a print block command (P) or User Function print request. The response
from the meter is either a full field transmission or an abbreviated transmission.
The meter response is established in Module 7.
Command String Construction
The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to invalid commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:
Full Transmission
1. The first characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed by a
2 character address number. The address number of the meter is
programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node address
itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the Register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a Register ID character.
It prints according to the selections made in print options.
4. If constructing a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is
sent next.
5. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters *, $ or when Counter C is set for slave mode <CR>. The meter
does not begin processing the command string until this character is received.
See Timing Diagram figure for differences between terminating characters.
Byte
Description
1, 2
2 byte Node (Meter) Address field [00-99]
3
✰
<SP> (Space)
4-6
3 byte Register Mnemonic field
7-18
12 byte numeric data field: 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one
byte for decimal point
19
<CR> (Carriage return)
20
<LF> (Line feed)
21
<SP> (Space)✰
22
<CR> (Carriage return)✰
23
<LF> (Line feed)✰
These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
F
Max
MAX
T, V, R
5 digit, positive only
G
Scale Factor A
SFA
T, V
6 digit, positive only
The first two characters transmitted (bytes 1 and 2) are the unit address. If the
address assigned is 00, two spaces are substituted. A space (byte 3) follows the
unit address field. The next three characters (bytes 4 to 6) are the register
mnemonic. The numeric data is transmitted next.
The numeric field (bytes 7 to 18) is 12 characters long. When the requested
value exceeds eight digits for count values or five digits for rate values, an *
(used as an overflow character) replaces the space in byte 7. Byte 8 is always a
space. The remaining ten positions of this field (bytes 9 to 18) consist of a minus
sign (for negative values), a floating decimal point (if applicable), and eight
positions for the requested value. The data within bytes 9 to 18 is right-aligned
with leading spaces for any unfilled positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with <CR> (byte 19), and <LF>
(byte 20). When a block print is finished, an extra <SP> (byte 21), <CR> (byte
22), and <LF> (byte 23) are used to provide separation between the
transmissions.
H
Scale Factor B
SFB
T, V
6 digit, positive only
Abbreviated Transmission
I
Scale Factor C
SFC
T, V
6 digit, positive only
Byte
J
Count Load A
LDA
T, V
5 negative / 6 positive
1-12
K
Count Load B
LDB
T, V
5 negative / 6 positive
L
Count Load C
LDC
T, V
5 negative / 6 positive
M
Setpoint 1
SP1
T, V, R
5 negative / 6 positive
O
Setpoint 2
SP2
T, V, R
5 negative / 6 positive
13
14
15
16
17
Q
Setpoint 3
SP3
T, V, R
5 negative / 6 positive
S
Setpoint 4
SP4
T, V, R
5 negative / 6 positive
U
Auto/Manual Register
MMR
T, V
0 - auto, 1 - manual
W
Analog Output Register
AOR
T, V
0 - 4095 normalized
X
Setpoint Register
SOR
T, V
0 - not active, 1 - active
Register Identification Chart
ID
VALUE DESCRIPTION
REGISTER
COMMAND
NAME 1
2
TRANSMIT DETAILS
3
A
Count A
CTA
T, V, R
6 digit (V), 8 digit (T)
B
Count B
CTB
T, V, R
6 digit (V), 8 digit (T)
C
Count C
CTC
T, V, R
6 digit (V), 8 digit (T)
D
Rate
RTE
T, V
5 digit, positive only
E
Min
MIN
T, V, R
5 digit, positive only
Description
12 byte data field, 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one byte
for decimal point
<CR> (Carriage return)
<LF> (Line feed)
<SP> (Space)✰
<CR> (Carriage return)✰
<LF> (Line feed)✰
These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The abbreviated response suppresses the address and register mnemonics,
leaving only the numeric part of the response.
✰
Meter Response Examples:
1. Address = 17, full field response, Count A = 875
17 CTA
875 <CR><LF>
2. Address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 2 = -250.5
SP2
-250.5<CR><LF>
3. Address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 2 = 250, last line of block print
250<CR><LF><SP><CR><LF>
1. Register Names are also used as Register Mnemonics during full transmission.
2. The registers associated with the P command are set up in Print Options (Module 7).
3. Unless otherwise specified, the Transmit Details apply to both T and V
Commands.
25
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Writing to this register (VW) while the analog output is in the Manual Mode
causes the output signal level to update immediately to the value sent. While in
the Automatic Mode, this register may be written to, but it has no effect until the
analog output is placed in the manual mode. When in the Automatic Mode, the
meter controls the analog output signal level. Reading from this register (TW)
will show the present value of the analog output signal.
Example: VW2047 will result in an output of 10.000 mA, 12.000 mA or
5.000V depending on the range selected.
Auto/Manual Mode Register (MMR) ID: U
This register sets the controlling mode for the outputs. In Auto Mode (0) the
meter controls the setpoint and analog output. In Manual Mode (1) the outputs
are defined by the registers SOR and AOR. When transferring from auto mode
to manual mode, the meter holds the last output value (until the register is
changed by a write). Each output may be independently changed to auto or
manual. In a write command string (VU), any character besides 0 or 1 in a field
will not change the corresponding output mode.
U abcde
Setpoint Output Register (SOR) ID: X
e = Analog Output
d = SP4
c = SP3
b = SP2
a = SP1
This register stores the states of the setpoint outputs. Reading from this
register (TX) will show the present state of all the setpoint outputs. A “0” in the
setpoint location means the output is off and a “1” means the output is on.
X abcd
d = SP4
c = SP3
b = SP2
a = SP1
Example: VU00011 places SP4 and Analog in manual.
Analog Output Register (AOR) ID: W
This register stores the present signal value of the analog output. The range
of values of this register is 0 to 4095, which corresponds to the analog output
range per the following chart:
*Due to the absolute
Output Signal*
accuracy rating and
Register Value
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
0-10V
resolution of the output
0
0.000
4.000
0.000
card, the actual output
1
0.005
4.004
0.0025
signal may differ 0.15% FS
from the table values. The
2047
10.000
12.000
5.000
output signal corresponds
4094
19.995
19.996
9.9975
to the range selected (0-20
4095
20.000
20.000
10.000
mA, 4-20 mA or 0-10 V).
In Automatic Mode, the meter controls the setpoint output state. In Manual
Mode, writing to this register (VX) will change the output state. Sending any
character besides 0 or 1 in a field or if the corresponding output was not first in
manual mode, the corresponding output value will not change. (It is not
necessary to send least significant 0s.)
Example: VX10 will result in output 1 on and output 2 off.
COUNTER C SLAVE COMMUNICATIONS
Counter C may be programmed for
, to act as a serial slave display. By doing this, the carriage return <CR>
is added as a valid command terminator character for all serial command strings. The <CR> as a terminator may be
very useful for standard serial commands, even if Counter C is never displayed or sent a slave message. The $
terminator should not be used in the slave mode. If numeric values are not to be saved to EPROM then send the value
as a literal transmission with <CR> terminator.
The Counter C slave display is right aligned. It has a capacity of displaying six characters. When less than six
characters are received, blank spaces will be placed in front of the characters. If more than six characters are sent,
then only the last six are displayed. The meter has a 192 character buffer for the slave display. If more than 192
characters are sent, the additional characters are discarded until a terminator is received. Counter C processes
numeric and literal transmissions differently.
Numeric Transmissions
Literal Transmissions
When a string that does not begin with #, T, V, P or R is received, the meter
processes it as a Numeric transmission. In this case, only the recognized numbers
and punctuation are displayed. All other characters in the string are discarded. If
a negative sign appears anywhere in the string the resulting number will be
negative. Only the most significant decimal point is retained. If no numerical
characters are received, then the numeric value will be zero. The numeric display
can be used for setpoint (boundary action only) and analog output functions.
When using this display for setpoint and analog output values, the decimal point
position must match the programming entered through the front panel. The
numeric value is retained in Counter C memory until another Numeric
transmission is received.
When a string that begins with # is received, the meter processes it as a Literal
transmission. In this case, any unrecognized characters will be replaced with a
space. A Literal display will replace a Numeric value in the Counter C display.
However, it will not remove a previous Numeric value from Counter C memory
or prevent the Counter C outputs from functioning with the Numeric value.
Literal transmissions are only possible when using RS232 or RS485 cards.
Recognized Characters = a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, l, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u,
y, z (in upper or lower case)
Recognized Numbers = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Recognized Punctuation = period, comma, minus, blank
Recognized Numbers = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Recognized Punctuation = period, comma, minus
26
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
COMMAND RESPONSE TIME
SERIAL TIMING
The meter can only receive data or transmit data at any one time (half-duplex
operation). During RS232 transmissions, the meter ignores commands while
transmitting data, but instead uses RXD as a busy signal. When sending
commands and data to the meter, a delay must be imposed before sending
another command. This allows enough time for the meter to process the
command and prepare for the next command.
At the start of the time interval t1, the computer program prints or writes the
string to the com port, thus initiating a transmission. During t1, the command
characters are under transmission and at the end of this period, the command
terminating character (*, $ or slave only <CR>) is received by the meter. The
time duration of t1 is dependent on the number of characters and baud rate of
the channel.
COMMENT
PROCESS TIME (t2)
Numeric Slave
2-50 msec.
R
Reset
2-50 msec.
#
Literal
2-50 msec.
V
Write
100-200 msec.
T
Transmit
2-50 msec. for $
P
Print
COMMAND
50-100 msec. for * and <CR>
2-50 msec. for $
50-100 msec. for * and <CR>
Timing Diagrams
t1 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
At the start of time interval t2, the meter starts the interpretation of the
command and when complete, performs the command function. This time
interval t2 varies (See Timing Diagrams). If no response from the meter is
expected, the meter is ready to accept another command.
If the meter is to reply with data, the time interval t2 is controlled by the use
of the command terminating character. The ‘*’ or ‘<CR>’ terminating character
results in a response time window of 50 msec. minimum and 100 msec.
maximum. This allows sufficient time for the release of the sending driver on
the RS485 bus. Terminating the command line with ‘$’ results in a response
time window (t2) of 2 msec. minimum and 50 msec. maximum. The faster
response time of this terminating character requires that sending drivers release
within 2 msec. after the terminating character is received.
At the beginning of time interval t3, the meter responds with the first
character of the reply. As with t1, the time duration of t3 is dependent on the
number of characters and baud rate of the channel. At the end of t3, the meter is
ready to receive the next command.
NO REPLY FROM METER
RESPONSE FROM METER
t3 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
The maximum serial throughput of the meter is limited to the sum of the
times t1, t2 and t3.
COMMUNICATION FORMAT
Data is transferred from the meter through a serial communication channel.
In serial communications, the voltage is switched between a high and low level
at a predetermined rate (baud rate) using ASCII encoding. The receiving device
reads the voltage levels at the same intervals and then translates the switched
levels back to a character.
The voltage level conventions depend on the interface standard. The table
lists the voltage levels for each standard.
LOGIC
INTERFACE STATE
RS232*
RS485*
1
mark (idle)
TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V
a-b < -200 mV
0
space (active)
TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V
a-b > +200 mV
* Voltage levels at the Receiver
Data is transmitted one byte at a time with a variable idle period between
characters (0 to ∞). Each ASCII character is “framed” with a beginning start bit,
an optional parity bit and one or more ending stop bits. The data format and
baud rate must match that of other equipment in order for communication to
take place. The figures list the data formats employed by the meter.
Character Frame Figure
Parity bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The PAX meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and
sets the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.
Start bit and Data bits
Data transmission always begins with the start bit. The start bit signals the
receiving device to prepare for reception of data. One bit period later, the least
significant bit of the ASCII encoded character is transmitted, followed by the
remaining data bits. The receiving device then reads each bit position as they are
transmitted.
Stop bit
The last character transmitted is the stop bit. The stop bit provides a single bit
period pause to allow the receiver to prepare to re-synchronize to the start of a
new transmission (start bit of next byte). The receiver then continuously looks
for the occurrence of the start bit. If 7 data bits and no parity is selected, then 2
stop bits are sent from the PAXI.
27
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.8 MODULE 8 - ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERS (
PAXI ONLY
PARAMETER MENU
Module 8 is the programming for the analog output parameters. To have an
analog output signal, an analog output plug-in card needs to be installed (See
Ordering Information). This section replaces the bulletin that comes with the
analog plug-in card. Please discard the separate literature when using the plugin card with the PAXI.
ANALOG LOW SCALE VALUE
«
ª
«
ª
0-20
4-20
0-10
RANGE
0 to 20 mA
ANALOG HIGH SCALE VALUE
«
ª
A CNt b CNt C CNt
rAtE
LO
HI
= Counter A Value
= Counter B Value
= Counter C Value
rAtE
LO
HI
-99999
to
999999
Enter the display value within the selected Analog Assignment that
corresponds to the high limit of the type selected.
The decimal point is determined by the decimal point setting of the assigned
counter or rate. The scale value can not be set to read values with more than 6
digits. Reverse acting output is possible by reversing the scaling values.
Select the display that the analog output is to follow:
A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
999999
0 to 10 V
ANALOG ASSIGNMENT
ª
to
4 to 20 mA
Enter the analog output type. For voltage output use terminals 16 and 17. For
current output use terminals 18 and 19. Only one range can be used at a time.
«
-99999
Enter the display value within the selected Analog Assignment that
corresponds to the low limit of the type selected.
The decimal point is determined by the decimal point setting of the assigned
counter or rate. The scale value can not be set to read values with more than 6
digits. Reverse acting output is possible by reversing the scaling values.
ANALOG TYPE
SELECTION
)
= Rate Value
= Minimum Value
= Maximum Value
6.9 MODULE 9 - FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (
)
PARAMETER MENU
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL
«
ª
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS
Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (0-15) by
using the arrow keys. The display will actively dim or
brighten as the levels are changed. This parameter also
appears in Quick Programming Mode when enabled.
«
Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
The meter will display
and then returns to
.
Press DSP key to return to the Display Mode. This will
overwrite all user settings with the factory settings.
Pressing the PAR and DSP keys at the same time on power-up will load the
factory settings and display
. This allows operation in the event of a
memory failure or corrupted data. Immediately press RST key and reprogram
the meter. If the meter is powered down again before pressing the RST key, the
existing dynamic data will not be overwritten.
ª
28
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Analog Output Card Calibration
PAXI: CALIBRATION
Before starting, verify that a precision meter with an accuracy of 0.05% or
better (voltmeter for voltage output and/or current meter for current output) is
connected and ready. Then perform the following procedure:
1. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
2.
is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select
and press PAR.
3. Using the chart below, step through the five selections to be calibrated. At
each prompt, use the PAXI arrow keys to adjust the output so that the
external meter display matches the selection being calibrated. When the
external reading matches, or if the range is not being calibrated, press PAR.
«
The only item in the PAXI meter that can be calibrated
is the Analog Output. The Count A and B values are scaled
using the parameters in Module 1, Counter C value is scaled
using Module 5 and the Rate value is scaled using Module 4. If the meter appears
to be indicating incorrectly or inaccurately, refer to the Troubleshooting section.
When Analog Out recalibration is required (generally every 2 years), it
should be performed by qualified technicians using appropriate equipment.
Calibration does not change any user programmed parameters.
Calibration may be aborted by disconnecting power to the meter before
exiting Module 9. In this case, the existing calibration settings remain in effect.
ª
SELECTION
EXTERNAL METER
0.0-A
4.0-A
20.0-A
0.0u
10.0u
Note: Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before staring calibration.
4. When
ACTION
0.00
Adjust if necessary, press PAR
4.00
Adjust if necessary, press PAR
20.00
Adjust if necessary, press PAR
0.00
Adjust if necessary, press PAR
10.00
Adjust if necessary, press PAR
appears, press PAR twice and remove the external meters .
TROUBLESHOOTING
For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.
PROBLEM
REMEDIES
NO DISPLAY
CHECK: Power level, power connections
PROGRAM LOCKED-OUT
CHECK: Active (lock-out) user input
ENTER: Security code requested
CERTAIN DISPLAYS ARE LOCKED OUT
CHECK: Module 3 programming
INCORRECT DISPLAY VALUE or NOT
COUNTING
CHECK: Input wiring, DIP switch setting, input programming, scale factor calculation,
input signal level, user input jumper, lower input signal frequency
USER INPUT NOT WORKING CORRECTLY
CHECK: User input wiring, user input jumper, user input being used for signal, Module 2
OUTPUT DOES NOT WORK
CHECK: Corresponding plug-in card installation, output configuration, output wiring
JITTERY DISPLAY
CHECK: Wiring is per EMC installation guidelines, input signal frequency, signal quality,
scaling, update time, DIP switch setting
“
CHECK: Lower input signal frequency, reduce rate scaling
” RATE
MODULES or PARAMETERS NOT ACCESSIBLE
CHECK: Corresponding plug-in card installation, related controlling parameter selected
ERROR CODE (
PRESS: Reset key (if unable to clear contact factory.)
)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
CHECK: Wiring, connections, meter and host settings
Shaded areas are model dependent.
29
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PARAMETER VALUE CHART
PAX Model Number _________
Programmer ________________ Date ________
Meter# _____________ Security Code __________
4-rtE Rate Input Parameters - PAXI & R only
1-INP Counter A & B Input Parameters - PAXC & I only
FACTORY
SETTING
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
A CNt
ArESEt
AdECPt
ASCFAC
COUNTER A OPERATING MODE
COUNTER A RESET ACTION
COUNTER A DECIMAL POSITION
COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR (A)
COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR (B) *
COUNTER A SCALE MULTIPLIER
COUNTER A COUNT LOAD VALUE (A)
COUNTER A COUNT LOAD VALUE (B)*
COUNTER A RESET POWER-UP
PRESCALER OUTPUT ENABLE
PRESCALER SCALE VALUE
COUNTER B OPERATING MODE
COUNTER B RESET ACTION
COUNTER B DECIMAL POSITION
COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR (A)
COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR (B)*
COUNTER B SCALE MULTIPLIER
COUNTER B COUNT LOAD VALUE (A)
COUNTER B COUNT LOAD VALUE (B)*
COUNTER B RESET POWER-UP
ASCALr
ACNtLd
A P-UP
PrSEN
PrVAL
b CNt
brESEt
bdECPt
bSCFAC
bSCALr
bCNtLd
b P-UP
USER SETTING
DISPLAY
cnt
ZErO
rAtEEN
LO-Udt
HI-Udt
rtE dP
SE6S
rdSP 0
rINP 0
rdSP 1
rINP 1
rdSP 2
rINP 2
rdSP 3
rINP 3
rdSP 4
rINP 4
rdSP 5
rINP 5
rdSP 6
rINP 6
rdSP 7
rINP 7
rdSP 8
rINP 8
rdSP 9
rINP 9
rOUNd
LOCUt
HI-t
LO-t
500
* See Module 2, Exchanging Parameter Lists, for details on programming this value.
Shaded areas are model dependent.
2-FNC User Input and Function Key Parameters
DISPLAY
USr-1
USr-2
USr-3
F1
F2
rSt
Sc-F1
Sc-F2
PARAMETER
USER INPUT 1
USER INPUT 2
USER INPUT 3
FUNCTION KEY 1
FUNCTION KEY 2
RESET KEY
2nd FUNCTION KEY 1
2nd FUNCTION KEY 2
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
dSPrSt
NO
NO
A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
rAtE
HI
LO
SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4
ACNtLd
bCNtLd
CCNtLd
ASCFAC
bSCFAC
CSCFAC
COdE
PARAMETER
COUNTER A DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
COUNTER B DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
COUNTER C DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
RATE DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
MAX DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
MIN DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
SETPOINT 1 ACCESS LOCK-OUT
SETPOINT 2 ACCESS LOCK-OUT
SETPOINT 3 ACCESS LOCK-OUT
SETPOINT 4 ACCESS LOCK-OUT
COUNT LOAD A ACCESS
COUNT LOAD B ACCESS
COUNT LOAD C ACCESS
SCALE FACTOR A ACCESS
SCALE FACTOR B ACCESS
SCALE FACTOR C ACCESS
SECURITY CODE
FACTORY
SETTING
FACTORY
SETTING
RATE ASSIGNMENT
LOW UPDATE TIME
HIGH UPDATE TIME
RATE DECIMAL POINT
LINEARIZER SEGMENTS
SCALING PT. 1 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 1 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 2 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 2 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 3 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 3 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 4 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 4 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 5 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 5 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 6 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 6 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 7 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 7 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 8 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 8 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 9 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 9 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 10 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 10 - INPUT VALUE
RATE DISPLAY ROUNDING
MINIMUM LOW CUT OUT
MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME
MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME
rAtE-a
1.0
2.0
0
0
0
0.0
1000
1000.0
2000
2000.0
3000
3000.0
4000
4000.0
5000
5000.0
6000
6000.0
7000
7000.0
8000
8000.0
9000
9000.0
1
0
2.0
2.0
USER SETTING
Shaded areas are model dependent.
5-CtrC Counter C Input Parameters - PAXC & I only
3-LOC Display and Program Lockout Parameters
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
USER SETTING
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
C CNt
CrESEt
CdECPt
CSCFAC
COUNTER C OPERATING MODE
COUNTER C RESET ACTION
COUNTER C DECIMAL POSITION
COUNTER C SCALE FACTOR (A)
COUNTER C SCALE FACTOR (B)*
COUNTER C SCALE MULTIPLIER
COUNTER C COUNT LOAD VALUE (A)
COUNTER C COUNT LOAD VALUE (B)*
COUNTER C RESET POWER-UP
CSCALr
CCNtLd
rEd
LOC
LOC
rEd
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
ENt
LOC
LOC
0
C P-UP
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
NONE
ZErO
500
* See Module 2, Exchanging Parameter Lists, for details on programming this value.
Shaded areas are model dependent.
30
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6-SPt
DISPLAY
LIt-n
OUt-n
SUP-n
ACt-n
ASN-n
SP-n
trC-n
tYP-n
Stb-n
HYS-n
tOFF-n
tON-n
tOUt-n
AUtO-n
rSd-n
rSAS-n
rSAE-n
Setpoint (Alarm) Parameters
SP-1
PARAMETER
FACTORY
SETTING
SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS
SETPOINT OUTPUT LOGIC
SETPOINT POWER UP STATE
SETPOINT ACTION
SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT
SETPOINT VALUE (A)
SETPOINT VALUE (B)*
SETPOINT TRACKING
SETPOINT BOUNDARY TYPE
STANDBY OPERATION
SETPOINT HYSTERESIS (rate)
SETPOINT OFF DELAY
SETPOINT ON DELAY
SETPOINT TIME OUT
COUNTER AUTO RESET ACTION
SETPOINT RESET WITH DISPLAY
RESET WHEN SPn+1 ACTIVATES
RESET WHEN SPn+1 DEACTIVATES
NOr
NOr
OFF
OFF
A CNt
100
100
NO
HI
NO
0
0.00
0.00
1.00
NO
NO
NO
NO
SP-2
USER SETTING
FACTORY
SETTING
SP-3
USER SETTING
NOr
NOr
OFF
OFF
A CNt
100
100
NO
HI
NO
0
0.00
0.00
1.00
NO
NO
NO
NO
FACTORY
SETTING
SP-4
USER SETTING
NOr
NOr
OFF
OFF
A CNt
100
100
NO
HI
NO
0
0.00
0.00
1.00
NO
NO
NO
NO
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
NOr
NOr
OFF
OFF
A CNt
100
100
NO
HI
NO
0
0.00
0.00
1.00
NO
NO
NO
NO
* See Module 2, Exchanging Parameter Lists, for details on programming this value.
Shaded areas are model dependent.
7-SrL Serial Communication Parameters - PAXI only
DISPLAY
bAUd
dAtA
PAr
Addr
AbrV
A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
rAtE
HILO
SCFAC
CNtLd
SPNt
FACTORY
SETTING
PARAMETER
BAUD RATE
DATA BIT
PARITY BIT
METER ADDRESS
ABBREVIATED PRINTING
PRINT COUNTER A
PRINT COUNTER B
PRINT COUNTER C
PRINT RATE
PRINT MAX & MIN
PRINT SCALE FACTORS
PRINT COUNT LOAD VALUES
PRINT SETPOINT VALUES
8-AnA Analog Output Parameters - PAXI only
PARAMETER
FACTORY
SETTING
ANALOG TYPE
ANALOG ASSIGNMENT
ANALOG LOW SCALE VALUE
ANALOG HIGH SCALE VALUE
4-20
rAtE
0
1000
DISPLAY
USER SETTING
tYPE
ASIN
AN-LO
AN-HI
9600
7
Odd
00
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
USER SETTING
9-fCS Factory Service Parameters
DISPLAY
d-LEV
PARAMETER
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL
FACTORY
SETTING
USER SETTING
3
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Company warrants the products it manufactures against defects in materials and workmanship
for a period limited to two years from the date of shipment, provided the products have been stored,
handled, installed, and used under proper conditions. The Company’s liability under this limited
warranty shall extend only to the repair or replacement of a defective product, at The Company’s
option. The Company disclaims all liability for any affirmation, promise or representation with
respect to the products.
The customer agrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from, defend, and indemnify RLC against
damages, claims, and expenses arising out of subsequent sales of RLC products or products
containing components manufactured by RLC and based upon personal injuries, deaths, property
damage, lost profits, and other matters which Buyer, its employees, or sub-contractors are or may be
to any extent liable, including without limitation penalties imposed by the Consumer Product Safety
Act (P.L. 92-573) and liability imposed upon any person pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act (P.L. 93-637), as now in effect or as amended hereafter.
No warranties expressed or implied are created with respect to The Company’s products except those
expressly contained herein. The Customer acknowledges the disclaimers and limitations contained
herein and relies on no other warranties or affirmations.
31
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Counter C
Reset
Action
Counter C
Operating
Mode
Factory
Service Code
Display
Intensity Level
x
Off Time
Delay
Meter
Address
Analog Low
Scale Value
Print Scale
Factors
Print Setpoint
Values
Print
Counter A
Print Count
Load Values
Print
Options
Reset
w/SPn+1
Activates
Boundary
Type
Min. Capture
Delay Time
Reset
w/SPn+1
Deactivates
Max. Capture
Delay Time
Prescaler
Scale
Value
x = Counter A, B, or C
= Setpoint number
# = Scaling Points (0-9)
Setpoint
Tracking
Reset
w/Display
Reset
Setpoint
Value
Min. Low
Cut-out
Security
Code
Prescaler
Output
Enable
Rate Display
Rounding
Counter C
Reset at
Power-up
Counter
Auto Reset
Setpoint
Assignment
Counter C
Count Load
Value
Time-out
Value
Abbreviated
Printing
Setpoint
Action
#
Rate Scaling
Input
Scale
Factor x
Access
Counter x
Count Load
Access
#
x
x
FUNCTION KEYS
x
Counter x
Reset at
Power-up
x
Counter x
Count Load
Value
Rate Scaling
Display
Counter C
Scale
Multiplier
Linearizer
Segments
Print
Max/Min
Analog High
Scale Value
x
Counter x
Scale
Multiplier
Setpoint 1-4
Access
On Time
Delay
Power-up
State
Counter C
Scale
Factor
Rate Decimal
Position
Min
Display
Lock-out
Counter x
Scale
Factor
Print Rate
Parity Bit
Print
Counter C
Analog
Assignment
Print
Counter B
Data Bit
Output
Logic
Counter C
Decimal
Position
High Update
Time
Max
Display
Lock-out
Setpoint
Hysteresis
Analog
Type
Baud
Rate
Standby
Operation
Setpoint
Annunciators
Low Update
Time
Rate
Assignment
Setpoint
Select
Rate
Display
Lock-out
Counter x
Display
Lock-out
x
USER INPUTS
x
Counter x
Decimal
Position
x
Counter x
Reset
Action
x
Counter x
Operating
Mode
F1/F2 Keys
Counter parameters apply to the PAXC and PAXI, while the rate
parameters apply to the PAXR and PAXI.
PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
32
Bulletin No. CUB5-F
Drawing No. LP0584
Released 1/08
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion.net
MODEL CUB5 - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 8-DIGIT DUAL
COUNTER AND RATE INDICATOR
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR GREEN/RED LED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.46" (11.7 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z OPTIONAL SETPOINT OUTPUT MODULES
z OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS MODULE (RS232 or RS485)
z OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALING FOR COUNT AND RATE
z BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL
z QUADRATURE SENSING (UP TO 4 TIMES RESOLUTION)
C
U
L
R
z BUILT-IN BATCH COUNTING CAPABILITY
US LISTED
z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT SETPOINT OUTPUT
IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COUNTER
The CUB5 receives incoming pulses and multiplies them by the Count Scale
Factor to obtain the desired reading for the count display. Input A accepts the
signal for the count and Input B is used for quadrature, dual counter, anticoincidence counting, or up/down control counting.
The CUB5 provides the user the ultimate in flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional setpoint control and communication capability.
The meter can be programmed as a single or dual counter with rate indication
capability. The display can be toggled either manually or automatically between
the selected displays.
The CUB5 display has 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits. The LCD is available in
two versions, reflective (CUB5R000) and backlight (CUB5B000). The
backlight version is user selectable for green or red backlighting with variable
display intensity.
The counter is programmable for one of eight different count modes,
including bi-directional and quadrature. When programmed as a dual counter,
each counter has a separate scale factor and decimal points. In the counter/rate
indicator mode, each have their own scaling and decimal point read-outs in
different engineering units. The internal batch counter can be used to count
setpoint output activations.
The meter has two separate inputs which provide different functions
depending on which operating mode is selected. Input A accepts the signal for
the Count and/or Rate displays, while Input B accepts the signal for the Count
display or direction control. In the anti-coincidence mode, both inputs are
monitored simultaneously so that no counts are lost. The resulting display can
be chosen as the sum or difference of the two inputs. The Rate Indicator has
programmable low (minimum) and high (maximum) update times to provide
optimal display response at any input frequency. There is a programmable user
input that can be programmed to perform a variety of functions.
The capability of the CUB5 can be easily expanded with the addition of
option modules. Setpoint capability is field installable with the addition of the
single setpoint relay output module or the dual setpoint solid state output
module. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485 is added with a
serial option module.
The CUB5 can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5. The
MLPS1 is powered from 85 to 250 VAC and provides up to 400 mA to drive the
unit and sensors.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
RATE
The rate indicator utilizes the signal at Input A to calculate the rate value
using a time interval method (1/tau). The unit counts on the negative edge of the
input pulses. After the programmed minimum update time elapses and the next
negative edge occurs, the unit calculates the input rate based on the number of
edges that occurred during the elapsed time. The input rate is then multiplied by
the rate scaling value to calculate the rate display.
At slower rates, averaging can be accomplished by programming the rate
minimum update time for the desired response. Extensive scaling capabilities
allow practically any desired reading at very slow count rates.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this meter to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the meter.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installationand operation of the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.
1
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE
MODEL NO.
CUB5B
Dual Counter & Rate Indicator with Backlight Display
CUB5B000
CUB5RLY
Single Relay Option Card
CUB5RLY0
CUB5SNK
Dual Sinking Open Collector Output card
CUB5SNK0
RS485 Serial Communications Card
CUB5COM1
RS232 Serial Communications Card
CUB5COM2
CUB5COM
Accessories
PART NUMBER
Dual Counter & Rate Indicator with Reflective Display
CUB5
Optional Plug-in Cards
DESCRIPTION
CUB5R
CUB5R000
MLPS1
Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC
MLPS1000
CBLPRO
Programming Cable RS232 (RJ11-DB9)
CBLPROG0
CBPRO
Programming Cable RS485 (RJ11-DB9)
CBPRO007
SFCRD
Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP *
SFCRD200
*Crimson 2 software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net/
GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5B000 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
1. DISPLAY: 8 digit LCD 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits
CUB5R000: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5B000: Transmissive LCD with selectable red or green LED backlight,
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability with output state
when using an output module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a Class 2 or SELV
rated power supply.
MODEL
NO.
DISPLAY COLOR
CUB5R000
CUB5B000
CUB5B000
--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)
INTENSITY LEVEL
Red Display
Green Display
INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
@ 9 VDC WITHOUT @ 9 VDC WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5RLY0
10 mA
85 mA
95 mA
1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5
TEMPERATURE
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C
Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5
hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 40 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
11. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA 22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/9257C/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #E179259-V01-S02
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
12. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)
30 mA
115 mA
125 mA
3. COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Counter A: 8-digits, enabled in all count modes
Display Range: -9999999 to 99999999
Overflow Indication: Display flashes “Cnt OVEr”
Counter B: 7-digits, enabled in Dual Counter Mode or batch counting
Display Designator: “b” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 9999999 (positive count only)
Overflow Indication: Display flashes “bCntOVEr”
Maximum Count Rates: 50% duty cycle
Without setpoint option card: 20 KHz (all count modes)
With setpoint option card: 20 KHz for any count mode except Dual Counter
(16 KHz), Quadrature x2 (14 KHz) and Quadrature x4 (13 KHz).
4. RATE DISPLAY: 6-digits, may be enabled or disabled in any count mode
Display Designator: “R” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 999999
Over Range Display: “R OLOLOL”
Maximum Frequency: 20 KHz
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.01%
5. COUNT/RATE SIGNAL INPUTS (INP A and INP B):
Input A: DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources.
See Section 2.0 Setting the DIP Switches for Input A specifications.
Input B: Logic signals only
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Current sinking: Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Filter (LO Freq.): Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce.
Limits input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec min.
6. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable input. Connect to input common (INP
COMM) to activate function. Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC.
Threshold Levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and count values when power is removed.
8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
9. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5R000: -35 to 75°C
2
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS
DUAL SINKING OUTPUT CARD (One or two setpoints)
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET
Current Rating: 100 mA max.
VDS ON: 0.7 V @ 100 mA
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 mA max.
The CUB5 meters can be fitted with optional output cards and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable, 2 msec min. or 50 msec min.
SINGLE RELAY OUTPUT CARD (One setpoint only)
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.
1.0 INSTALLING
THE
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
METER
INSTALLATION
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approx. 28 to 36 in-oz [0.202 to 0.26 N-m]). Do not over-tighten the screws.
The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the unit into the panel cutout.
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near devices that
generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
2.0 SETTING
THE
DIP SWITCHES
SETTING THE INPUT DIP SWITCHES
To access the switches, remove the rear cover of the meter as described
below. A bank of 4 switches is located in the upper right hand corner. After
setting the switches, install any optional plug-in cards before replacing the rear
cover (see next section).
The meter has four DIP switches for Input A and
Input B that must be set before applying power.
Input B LO Freq.
3 4
HI Freq.
HI Freq.
SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to
28 VDC, IMAX = 3.8 mA.
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor,
7.2 mA max. @ 28 VDC max.
1 2
SNK.
SWITCH 2
ON
Logic
To remove the rear cover, locate the cover locking tab below the 2nd and 3rd
input terminals. To release the tab, insert a small, flat blade screwdriver between
the tab and the plastic wall below the terminals. Inserting the screwdriver will
provide enough pressure to release the tab locks. To replace the cover, align the
cover with the input terminals and press down until the cover snaps into place.
Input A LO Freq.
REMOVING THE REAR COVER
Input A SRC.
LOGIC: Input A trigger levels VIL = 1.25 V max.;
VIH = 2.75 V min.; VMAX = 28 VDC
MAG: 200 mV peak input sensitivity; 100 mV
hysteresis; maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak
(28 Vrms); Must also have SRC switch ON.
(Not recommended with counting applications.)
Input A MAG.
SWITCH 1
Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards.
Remove all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing
inside of the meter.
Factory Setting
SWITCHES 3 and 4
HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Adds a damping capacitor for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec.
3
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare
metal object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled
clean workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges.
Dirt, oil or other contaminants that may contact the cards can
adversely affect circuit operation.
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter. After
installing the cards, replace the rear cover before wiring the meter.
REPLACING THE REAR COVER
To replace the rear cover, align the cover with the input terminals and press
down until the cover snaps into place.
Setpoint Card
Comms Card
Locking Tab
4.0 WIRING
THE
METER
WIRING OVERVIEW
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed
(stranded wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct
screw-clamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
4.1 POWER WIRING
4.2 USER INPUT WIRING
DC Power
Sinking Logic
+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC
INP COMM
USR
}
Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and Input Common.
The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low (<1 .0 V).
4
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
4.3 INPUT WIRING
CAUTION: Power common (PWR COMMON) is NOT isolated from input common (INP COMM). In order to preserve the safety of the meter
application, the power common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth
ground potential. If not, hazardous voltage may be present at the Signal or User Inputs and input common terminals. Appropriate considerations must
then be given to the potential of the input common with respect to earth ground; and the common of the plug-in cards with respect to input common.
Magnetic Pickup
Two Wire Proximity, Current Source
AC Inputs From Tach Generators, Etc.
Input A
Current Sinking Output
Input A
Input A
Interfacing With TTL
Current Sourcing Output
Input A
Input A
Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink
Input A
Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Source
Current Sink Output; Quad/Direction
Input A
Input A
Switch position is application dependent.
Shaded areas not recommended for counting applications.
4.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SINGLE SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
DUAL SETPOINT N-FET OPEN DRAIN PLUG-IN CARD
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
4.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD
RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS
5
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5.0 REVIEWING
THE
FRONT BUTTONS
AND
DISPLAY
KEY
DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
ENTERING PROGRAM MODE
PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION
SEL
Index display through enabled values
Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate
Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
RST
Resets count display(s) and/or outputs
Advances through the program menu/
Increments selected parameter value or selection
OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“R” - To the left of the display is the rate value.
b
“ ” - To the left of the display is the Counter B value (dual count or batch).
“1” and “2” - Indicates setpoint 1 and 2 output status.
- Counter A has no designator.
Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the rate and count values.
6.0 PROGRAMMING
THE
METER
OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL KEY)
PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL KEY)
It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL key. If it is not accessible then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock.
The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the SEL key with Pro NO
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and
return the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to
the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)
MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST KEYS)
It is recommended to start with Module 1 for counting or Module 2 for rate.
When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the parameter
programming and lock out parameter programming with the user input or
programming security code.
PROGRAMMING TIPS
The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST key is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL key.
FACTORY SETTINGS
MODULE MENU (SEL KEY)
Factory settings may be completely restored in Module 3. This is useful when
encountering programming problems.
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The SEL key is pressed to advance to a particular parameter
to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding parameters.
After completing a module, the display will return to Pro NO. Programming may
continue by accessing additional modules.
ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s factory setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.
SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The RST key is used to move through the
selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the SEL key, stores and activates the
displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to the next parameter.
For numeric values, press the RST key to access the value. The right hand
most digit will begin to flash. Pressing the RST key again increments the digit
by one or the user can hold the RST key and the digit will automatically scroll.
The SEL key will advance to the next digit. Pressing and holding the SEL key
will enter the value and move to the next parameter.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter
INP A-b «
ª Cnt ud
Selection/Value
Factory Settings are shown.
6
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS (1-INPUt)
PARAMETER MENU
Shaded area selections only apply when Counter B is enabled (Dual Counter
mode or batch counter).
COUNTER A COUNT LOAD VALUE
COUNT MODE
INP A-b «
ª Cnt ud
Cnt ud
RAtE Cnt
dUAL Cnt
qUAd 1
qUAd 2
qUAd 4
CmtA Ld «
ª 00000500
Add Add
Add Sub
Counter A resets to this value if Reset to Count Load action is selected.
Select the count mode that corresponds with your application. The input
actions are shown in the boxes below. For simple counting applications, it is
recommended to use Count with Direction for the count mode. Simply leave the
direction input unconnected.
DISPLAY
Cnt ud
RAtE Cnt
dUAL Cnt
qUAd 1
qUAd 2
qUAd 4
Add Add
Add Sub
MODE
INPUT A ACTION
INPUT B ACTION
Count with Direction
Counter A
Counter A Direction
Rate/Counter
Rate only
Counter A Add
Dual Counter
Counter A Add
Counter B Add
Quadrature x1
Count A
Quad A
Quadrature x2
Count A
Quad A
Quadrature x4
Count A
Quad A
2 Input Add/Add
Counter A Add
Counter A Add
2 Input Add/Subtract
Counter A Add
Counter A Subtract
COUNTER B BATCH COUNT ENABLE
Cmtb bAt
«
ª
NO
ª
0
0.0
0
0.00
0.000
Cntb dP
ª
Cntb ScF «
ª
01.0000
0.0000
0.00000
0.00
0.000
0.0000
0.00000
00.0001 to 99.9999
The number of input or batch counts is multiplied by the scale factor to
obtain the desired process value. A scale factor of 1.0000 will result in the
display of the actual number of input or batch counts. (Details on scaling
calculations are explained at the end of this section.)*
00.0001 to 99.9999
COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP
The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale factor to obtain the
desired process value. A scale factor of 1.0000 will result in the display of the
actual number of input counts. (Details on scaling calculations are explained at
the end of this section.)*
RSt P-UP
«
ª
NO
NO
yES
NO Count b
Count A both A-b
The selected counter(s) will reset at each meter power-up.
COUNTER A RESET ACTION
to 2Ero
0
0.0
0
COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR
COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR
CmtA rSt «
ª to 2Ero
«
This selects the decimal point position for Counter B. The selection will also
affect Counter B scale factor calculations.
This selects the decimal point position for Counter A. The selection will also
affect Counter A scale factor calculations.
CmtA ScF «
ª
01.0000
SP2
SP1-2
COUNTER B DECIMAL POSITION
COUNTER A DECIMAL POSITION
«
NO
SP1
The Counter B batch count function internally counts the number of output
activations of the selected setpoint(s). The count source for the batch counter
can be SP1, SP2 or both. Batch counting is available in all count modes except
Dual Counter, which uses an external input signal for Counter B. This
parameter only appears if a Setpoint Output option card is installed.
Note: The Rate indicator signal is derived from Input A in all count modes.
CntA dP
-9999999 to 99999999
to CtLd
* For value entry instructions, refer to selection/value entry in the Programming
The Meter section.
When Counter A is reset, it returns to Zero or Counter A Count Load value.
This reset action applies to all Counter A resets, except a setpoint generated
Counter Auto Reset programmed in Module 4.
COUNTER A COUNT DIRECTION
CmtA dir
ª
«
NOr
rEV
NOr
Reverse (rEV) switches the normal Counter A count direction shown in the
Count Mode parameter chart.
7
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SCALING FOR COUNT INDICATION
USER INPUT FUNCTION
The CUB5’s scale factor is factory set to 1, to provide one count on the
display for each pulse that is input to the unit. In many applications, there will
not be a one-to-one correspondence between input pulses and display units.
Therefore, it is necessary for the CUB5 to scale or multiply the input pulses by
a scale factor to achieve the desired display units (feet, meters, gallons, etc.)
The Count Scale Factor Value can range from 00.0001 to 99.9999. It is
important to note that the precision of a counter application cannot be improved
by using a scale factor greater than one. To accomplish greater precision, more
pulse information must be generated per measuring unit. The following formula
is used to calculate the scale factor.
USEr INP
«
ª
NO
DISPLAY
NO
Pro Loc
Inhibit
rESEt
StorE
Stor-rSt
d-SELECt
d-LEVEL
d-COLOr
Print
Prnt-r5t
rESEt-1
rESEt-2
rESEt-12
Scale Factor = Desired Display Units x Decimal Point Position
Number of Pulses
WHERE:
Desired Display Units: Count display units acquired after pulses that occurred.
Number of Pulses: Number of pulses required to achieve the desired
display units.
Decimal Point Position:
0
=
1
0.0
=
10
0.00
=
100
0.000
=
1000
0.0000
=
10000
0.00000 =
100000
EXAMPLE: The counter display is used to indicate the total number of feet
used in a process. It is necessary to know the number of pulses for the desired
units to be displayed. The decimal point is selected to show the resolution in
hundredths.
Scale Factor = Desired Display Units x Decimal Point Position
Number of Pulses
Given that 128 pulses are equal to 1 foot, display total feet with a onehundredth resolution.
Scale Factor = 1.00 x 100
128
Scale Factor = 0.007812 x 100
Scale Factor = 0.7812
MODE
DESCRIPTION
No Function
User Input disabled.
Program Mode Lock-out
See Programming Mode Access chart.
(Module 3)
Inhibit
Inhibit counting for the selected counter(s).
Maintained Reset
Level active reset of the selected counter(s).
Freeze display of selected counter(s) while
allowing counts to accumulate internally.
Edge triggered reset of the selected
counter(s) after storing the count.
Store
Store and Reset
Display Select *
Advance once for each activation
Display Intensity Level *
Backlight Color *
Print Request
Print and Reset *
Increase intensity one level for each
activation. (backlight version only)
Change backlight color with each activation
(backlight version only)
Serial transmit of the active parameters
selected in the Print Options (Module 5)
Same as Print Request followed by a
momentary reset of the selected counter(s).
Setpoint 1 Reset *
Reset Setpoint 1 output
Setpoint 2 Reset *
Reset Setpoint 2 output
Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset * Reset Setpoint 1 and 2 outputs
Note: * indicates Edge Triggered function. Other functions are Level Active
(maintained)
USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT
USEr ASN «
ª Count A
Count A
Count b
both A-b
The User Input Assignment is only active when Counter B is enabled and the
User Input performs a Reset, Inhibit or Store function on one or both counters.
6.2 MODULE 2 - RATE SETUP PARAMETERS (2-rAtE)
PARAMETER MENU
Module 2 is the programming for the rate parameters. For maximum input
frequency, Rate Enable should be set to NO when not in use. When set to NO, the
remaining rate parameters are not accessible. The rate value is shown with an
annunciator of “R” in the Display Mode.
RATE SCALING DISPLAY VALUE
RAtE dSP «
ª
001000
RATE ENABLE
RAtE Enb
ª
«
YES
NO
ª
«
O
to
999999
Enter the desired Rate Display Value for the Scaling Point.*
YES
RATE SCALING INPUT VALUE
RAtE INP «
ª
01000.0
RATE DECIMAL POINT
RAtE dP
0
0
0.0
0.00
0.000
0.0000
0.00000
0.1
to
99999.9
Enter the corresponding Rate Input Value for the Scaling Point.*
This selects the decimal point position for the rate display and any setpoint
value assigned to rate. This parameter does not affect rate scaling calculations.
*For value entry instructions, refer to selection/value entry in the Programming
The Meter section.
8
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
INPUT FREQUENCY CALCULATION
SCALING FOR RATE INDICATION
The meter determines the input frequency by summing the number of falling
edges received during a sample period of time. The sample period begins on the
first falling edge. At this falling edge, the meter starts accumulating time
towards Low Update and High Update values. Also, the meter starts
accumulating the number of falling edges. When the time reaches the Low
Update Time value, the meter looks for one more falling edge to end the sample
period. If a falling edge occurs (before the High Update Time value is reached),
the Rate display will update to the new value and the next sample period will
start on the same edge. If the High Update Time value is reached (without
receiving a falling edge after reaching Low Update Time), then the sample
period will end but the Rate display will be forced to zero. The High Update
Time value must be greater than the Low Update Time value. Both values must
be greater than 0.0. The input frequency calculated during the sample period, is
then shown as a Rate value determined by the scaling calculation.
To scale the rate, enter a Scaling Display value with a corresponding Scaling
Input value. These values are internally plotted to a display value of 0 and input
value of 0.0 Hz. A linear relationship is formed between these points to yield a
rate display value that corresponds to the incoming input signal rate. The meter
is capable of showing a rate display value for any linear process.
SCALING CALCULATION
If a display value versus input signal (in pulses per second) is known, then
those values can be entered into Scaling Display (RAtE dSP) and Scaling Input
(RAtE INP). No further calculations are needed.
If only the number of pulses per ‘single’ unit (i.e. # of pulses per foot) is
known, then it can be entered as the Scaling Input value and the Scaling Display
value will be entered as the following:
RATE PER
DISPLAY (RAtE
Second
dSP)
INPUT (RAtE
INP)
1
# of pulses per unit
Minute
60
# of pulses per unit
Hour
3600
# of pulses per unit
NOTES:
1. If # of pulse per unit is less than 10, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 10.
2. If # of pulse per unit is less than 1, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 100.
3. If the Display value is raised or lowered, then Input value must be raised
or lowered by the same proportion (i.e. Display value for per hour is
entered by a third less (1200) then Input value is a third less of # of pulses
per unit). The same is true if the Input value is raised or lowered, then
Display value must be raised or lowered by the same proportion.
4. Both values must be greater than 0.0.
EXAMPLE:
1. With 15.1 pulses per foot, show feet per minute in tenths. Scaling Display
= 60.0 Scaling Input = 15.1.
2. With 0.25 pulses per gallon, show whole gallons per hour. (To have greater
accuracy, multiply both Input and Display values by 10.) Scaling Display
= 36000 Scaling Input = 2.5.
RATE LOW UPDATE TIME
LO-Udt
ª
«
0.1
to
99.9
seconds
01.0
The Low Update Time is the minimum amount of time between display
updates for the rate display. Values of 0.1 and 0.2 seconds will update the
display correctly but may cause the display to appear unsteady.
RATE HIGH UPDATE TIME
HI-Udt
ª
«
02.0
0.2
to
99.9
seconds
The High Update Time is the maximum amount of time before the rate
display is forced to zero. (For more explanation, refer to Rate Value
Calculation.) The High Update Time must be higher than the Low Update Time
and higher than the desired slowest readable speed (one divided by pulses per
second). The factory setting of 2.0, will force the display to zero for speeds
below 0.5 Hz or a pulse every 2 seconds.
9
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY
AND
FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (3-dSPLAY)
PARAMETER MENU
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)
SEL Enb
ª
«
yES
yES
PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE
Pro CodE
NO
ª
The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.
ª
«
yES
NO
YES
NO
Count A
Count b
both A-b
dSPLAy
The yES selection allows the RST button to reset the selected counter(s). The
shaded selections are only active when Counter B is enabled (Dual Count mode
or batch counter).
«
ª
NO
yES
0
to
0
NO
not
Pro Loc
______
The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. Each display is shown for 4 seconds.
DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)
ª
«
rEd
Active
Immediate Access
1-99
Quick
Programming
After Quick Programming
with correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *
100-999
Pro CodE prompt
With correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *
1-99
Pro Loc
rEd
6rn
Not Active
Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.
FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS
Full Programming
0
d-COLOr
999
USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
KEY IS PRESSED
DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE
d-ScroLL
000
The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (Pro Loc) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits only
the setpoint output time-out and counter load values (when applicable) to be
modified, but allows direct access to these values without having to enter Full
Programming mode.
Programming a Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the Pro CodE prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Depending
on the code value, Quick Programming may be accessible before the Pro CodE
prompt appears (see chart).
FRONT PANEL COUNTER RESET ENABLE (RST)
RSt Enb
«
Programming
Lock
Quick
Programming
No Access
No Access
100-999
Pro CodE prompt
With correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *
0-999
Full Programming
Immediate Access
* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.
SOFTWARE VERSION DISPLAY
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)
d-LEVEL
ª
«
1
to
CodE UEr «
ª
NO
5
5
NO
yES
Select YES to momentarily display the meter software version before advancing
to the next parameter. The software version is also displayed at power-up.
Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
FACt SEt
«
ª
MO
NO
yES
The yES selection will return the meter to the factory default settings. The
meter will display rESEt and then return to Pro, at which time all settings have
been changed.
10
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SEtPt)
PARAMETER MENU
The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when an optional Setpoint
Output Module is installed in the meter. Some parameters in the menu will not
appear depending on the Setpoint Assignment and Setpoint Output Action. The
Setpoint Parameter Availability chart below illustrates this.
SETPOINT OUTPUT ACTION
SETPOINT SELECT
SPt SEL
«
ª
NO
NO
SP1
SPn ACt «
ª
LAtCH
SP2
Select the Setpoint Output to be programmed, starting with Setpoint 1. The
"n" in the following parameters reflects the chosen Setpoint number. After
Setpoint 1 is completely programmed, the display returns to SPt SEL. Repeat
steps for Setpoint 2 if both Setpoints are used in the application.
Select NO to exit the Setpoint programming module. The number of Setpoints
available is dependent on the Setpoint option module installed.
«
SPT ACTION DESCRIPTION
LAtCH
t-OUt
ª
NO
bOUNd
NO
YES
Select YES to enable Setpoint 2 and access the setup parameters. If
selected, the unit returns to SPt SEL and Setpoint 2 is disabled.
t-OUt
bOUNd
The parameter selects the action of the Setpoint Output as described in the
chart. Boundary output action is not applicable for Counter B assignment.
SETPOINT 2 ENABLE (SP2 Only)
SP2 Enb
LAtCH
OUTPUT ACTIVATES
OUTPUT DEACTIVATES
When Count =
Setpoint
When Count =
Setpoint
When Count ≥
Setpoint
When Count ≤
Setpoint
At Manual Reset
(if SPn rSt=YES)
After Setpoint
Output Time-Out
When Count
< Setpoint
When Count
> Setpoint
Latched Output Mode
Timed Output Mode
Boundary Mode
(High Acting Type)
Boundary Mode
(Low Acting Type)
NO is
SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT
SPn ASN «
ª Count A
Count A
Count b
rAtE
Select the display to which the Setpoint is assigned.
SETPOINT PARAMETER AVAILABILITY
COUNTER ASSIGNMENT (A or B) *
PARAMETER
SPn
SPn
SPn
SPn
SPn
SPn
SPn
SPn
SP1
SP2
SPn
SPn
tOUt
VAL
OUt
LIt
P-UP
tYPE
StbY
AUtO
OFF2
OFF1
rSt
ChC
DESCRIPTION
TIMED OUT BOUNDARY
RATE ASSIGNMENT
LATCH
TIMED OUT
BOUNDARY
LATCH
t-OUt
bOUNd
LAtCH
t-OUt
bOUNd
LAtCH
Setpoint Output Time-out Value
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Setpoint Value
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setpoint Output Logic
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setpoint Annunciator
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setpoint Output Power-up State
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Setpoint Boundary Type
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Standby Operation (Low acting only)
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Counter Auto Reset
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
SP1 Output Off at SP2 (SP1 only)
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
SP2 Output Off at SP1 (SP2 only)
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Output Reset with Manual Reset
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Change Display Color w/ Output State
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
* BOUNDARY Setpoint Action not applicable for Counter B Assignment
11
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SETPOINT OUTPUT TIME-OUT
SPn tOUt «
ª
001.00
0.01
to
599.99
COUNTER AUTO RESET
seconds
This parameter is only active if the Setpoint Action is set to time out (t-OUt).
Enter the value in seconds that the Setpoint output will be active, once the
Setpoint Value is reached.
Count A:
Count B:
Rate:
«
ª
NO
SELECTION
-9999999 to 99999999
0 to 9999999
0 to 999999
NO
2Ero-Str
CtLd-Str
2Ero-End
Enter the desired Setpoint value. To enter a negative setpoint value,
increment digit 8 to display a “-” sign (Counter A only).
CtLd-End
SETPOINT OUTPUT LOGIC
«
SPn OUt
ª
NOr
NOr
ª
NOr
ª
ON
SAVE
SPn rSt
ª
output at power up.
LO-ACt
High Acting Boundary Type activates the output when the assigned display
value (SPn ASN) equals or exceeds the Setpoint value. Low Acting activates the
output when the assigned display value is less than or equal to the Setpoint.
Out2-Str
Out2-End
NO
Out1-Str
Out1-End
«
YES
YES
NO
CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR WITH OUTPUT STATE
SETPOINT STANDBY OPERATION
NO
NO
Selecting YES causes the Setpoint output to deactivate (reset) when the
Setpoint Assigned Counter is reset. The counter reset can occur by the RST
button, User Input, Counter Reset at Power-up or a serial Reset Counter
command.
This output reset will not occur when the Assigned Counter is reset by a
Setpoint generated Counter Auto Reset.
SETPOINT BOUNDARY TYPE
SPn StbY «
ª
NO
Reset to Count Load value at the end of output activation
(timed out only).
SETPOINT OUTPUT RESET WITH MANUAL RESET
SAVE will restore the output to the same state it was at before the meter was
powered down. ON will activate the output at power up. OFF will deactivate the
HI-ACt
Reset to Zero at the end of output activation (timed out only).
This parameter will deactivate Setpoint 2 output at the Start or End of
Setpoint 1 output (O2 off at O1). The “-End” setting only applies if Setpoint 1
Output Action is programmed for timed output.
OFF
SPn tYPE «
ª
HI-ACt
Reset to Count Load value at the start of output activation.
SP2 OFF1 «
ª
NO
SETPOINT OUTPUT POWER-UP STATE
OFF
Reset to Zero at the start of output activation.
SETPOINT 2 OUTPUT OFF AT SETPOINT 1 (SP2 Only)
rEV
Normal (NOr) displays the setpoint annunciator when the corresponding
output is “on”. Reverse (rEV) displays the setpoint annunciator when the output
is “off”.
«
No Auto Reset.
This parameter will deactivate Setpoint 1 output at the Start or End of
Setpoint 2 output (O1 off at O2). The “-End” setting only applies if Setpoint 2
Output Action is programmed for timed output.
NOr
SPn P-UP
CtLd-Str
CtLd-End
ACTION
SP1 OFF2 «
ª
NO
SETPOINT ANNUNCIATOR
«
@2Ero-Str
2Ero-End
SETPOINT 1 OUTPUT OFF AT SETPOINT 2 (SP1 Only)
rEV
Normal (NOr) turns the output “on” when activated and “off” when
deactivated. Reverse (rEV) turns the output “off” when activated and “on” when
deactivated.
SPn LIt
NO
This parameter automatically resets the counter to which the setpoint is
assigned (SPn ASN) each time the setpoint value is reached. The automatic reset
can occur at output start, or at output end if the Setpoint Output Action is
programmed for timed output mode. The Reset-to-Count Load selections
(“CtLd-”) only apply to Counter A assignment. This reset may be different from
the Counter A Reset Action selected in Module 1.
SETPOINT VALUE
SPn VAL «
ª 00000100
SPn AUtO
SPn ChC
«
ª
NO
NO
YES
This parameter enables the backlight CUB5 to switch the backlight color when
the output state changes. This parameter is only active for the backlight version.
YES
This parameter only applies to Low Acting Boundary Type setpoints. Select
YES to disable a Low Acting Setpoint at power-up, until the assigned display
value crosses into the output “off” area. Once in the output “off” area, the
Setpoint will then function per the description for Low Acting Boundary Type.
12
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (5-SEriAL)
PARAMETER MENU
The Serial Communications Parameters are only accessible when an
optional RS232 or RS485 serial communications module is installed in the
meter.
ABBREVIATED PRINTING
This section replaces the bulletin shipped with the RS232 and RS485 serial
communications plug-in cards. Discard the separate bulletin when using those
serial plug-in cards with the CUB5B and CUB5R.
Abbr
ª
«
ª
300
600
9600
1200
2400
4800
9600
NO
YES
NO
This parameter determines the formatting of data transmitted from the meter
in response to a Transmit Value command or a Block Print Request. Select NO
for a full print transmission, consisting of the meter address, mnemonics, and
parameter data. Select YES for abbreviated print transmissions, consisting of the
parameter data only. This setting is applied to all the parameters selected in the
PRINT OPTIONS. (Note: If the meter address is 0, the address will not be sent
during a full transmission.)
BAUD RATE
bAUd
«
19200
38400
Set the baud rate to match that of other serial communications equipment.
Normally, the baud rate is set to the highest value that all of the serial
communications equipment is capable of transmitting and receiving.
PRINT OPTIONS
Prnt OPt «
ª
NO
DATA BIT
«
dAtA
ª
7-bit
8-bit
Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.
PARITY BIT
ª
«
NO
Odd
EVEN
Odd
This parameter only appears when the Data Bit parameter is set to a 7-bit
data word length. Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial equipment
on the serial link. The meter ignores parity when receiving data and sets the
parity bit for outgoing data. If parity is set to NO, an additional stop bit is used
to force the frame size to 10 bits.
DISPLAY
Count A
Count b
rAtE
CntA ScF
Cntb ScF
sSP1
SP2
CntA Ld
METER ADDRESS
Addr
ª
«
0
to
YES
This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A print request is also referred to as a block print because more than
one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting YES displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the print block. All active parameters entered as YES in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as NO will not be sent.
The “Print All” (Prnt ALL) option selects all meter values for transmitting
(YES), without having to individually select each parameter in the sublist.
Note: Inactive parameters will not be sent regardless of the print option
setting. For example, Counter B or Scale Factor B will only be sent if Counter
B is enabled (Dual Counter mode or batch count). Likewise, the Setpoint
value(s) will not be sent unless an optional setpoint card is installed in the
meter.
7-bit
PAritY
NO
99
00
Enter the serial node address. With a single unit, an address is not needed
and a value of zero can be used (RS232 applications). Otherwise, with multiple
bussed units, a unique address number must be assigned to each meter. The
node address applies specifically to RS485 applications.
DESCRIPTION
Counter A
Counter B
Rate Value
Scale Factor A
Scale Factor B
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
Counter A Count Load
FACTORY
SETTING
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
MNEMONIC
CTA
CTB
RTE
SFA
SFB
SP1
SP2
CLD
13
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Sending Serial Commands and Data
Register Identification Chart
When sending commands to the meter, a string containing at least one
command character must be constructed. A command string consists of a
command character, a value identifier, numerical data (if writing data to the
meter) followed by a command terminator character, * or $.
Applicable
Transmit Details (T and V)
Commands
ID
Value Description MNEMONIC
A
Counter A
CTA
T, V, R
8 digit positive/7 digit negative
(with minus sign)
B
Counter B
CTB
T, V, R
7 digit, positive only
Command Chart
C
Rate
RTE
T
6 digit, positive only
Command Description
D
Scale Factor A
SFA
T, V
6 digit, positive only
E
Scale Factor B
SFB
T, V,
6 digit, positive only
F
Setpoint 1
(Reset Output 1)
SP1
T, V, R
per setpoint Assignment, same
as Counter or Rate
G
Setpoint 2
(Reset Output 2)
SP2
T, V, R
per setpoint Assignment, same
as Counter or Rate
H
Counter A Count
Load Value
CLD
T, V
8 digit positive/7 digit negative
(with minus sign)
N
T
V
R
P
Notes
Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
one or two digit node address. Not required
when node address = 0.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by a register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
Value Change (write) followed by a register ID character and
numeric data.
Reset a count value or setpoint output. Must
Reset
be followed by a register ID character
Block Print Request Initiates a block print output. Registers in the
(read)
print block are selected in Print Options.
Node (meter)
Address Specifier
Command String Examples:
1. Node address = 17, Write 350 to the Setpoint 1 value
String: N17VF350*
2. Node address = 5, Read Counter A, response time of 50 msec min
String: N5TA*
3. Node address = 0, Reset Setpoint 1 output
String: RF*
4. Node address = 31, Request a Block Print Output, response time of 2 msec min
String: N31P$
Command String Construction
The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to illegal commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:
1. The first 2 or 3 characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed
by a 1 or 2 character node address number. The node address number of the
meter is programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node
address itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a register ID character. It
prints all the active selections chosen in the Print Options menu parameter.
4. If constructing a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is
sent next.
5. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters * or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string
until this character is received. See Command Response Time section for
differences in meter response time when using the * and $ terminating
characters.
Transmitting Data to the Meter
Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to transmit details listed in the
Register Identification Chart. Leading zeros are ignored. Negative numbers
must have a minus sign. The meter ignores any decimal point and conforms the
number to the scaled resolution. (For example: The meter’s scaled decimal point
position is set for 0.0 and 25 is written to a register. The value of the register is
now 2.5. In this case, write a value of 250 to equal 25.0).
Note: Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.
Receiving Data From The Meter
requested value. The data within bytes 9 to 18 is right-aligned with leading
spaces for any unfilled positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with a <CR> and <LF>. After the
last line of a block print, an extra <SP>, <CR> and <LF> are added to provide
separation between the print blocks.
Data is transmitted from the meter in response to either a transmit command
(T), a block print request command (P) or a User Input print request. The
response from the meter is either a full field transmission or an abbreviated
transmission, depending on the selection chosen in Module 5.
Full Field Transmission
Byte
Description
1, 2
2 byte Node Address field [00-99]
Abbreviated Transmission
Byte
Description
4-6
3 byte Register Mnemonic field
13
12 byte data field, 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign,
one byte for decimal point
<CR> (carriage return)
7-18
12 byte data field; 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one byte for
decimal point
14
<LF> (line feed)
15
<SP>* (Space)
16
<CR>* (carriage return)
17
<LF>* (line feed)
3
1-12
<SP> (Space)
19
<CR> (carriage return)
20
<LF> (line feed)
21
<SP>* (Space)
22
<CR>* (carriage return)
23
<LF>* (line feed)
* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The abbreviated response suppresses the node address and register ID,
leaving only the numeric part of the response.
* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted are the meter address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the meter address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic, as shown in the Register
Identification Chart.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field (bytes 7 to 18) is 12
characters long. When a requested counter or rate value exceeds the meter’s
display limits, an * (used as an overflow character) replaces a space in byte 7.
Byte 8 is always a space.
The remaining ten positions of this field consist of a minus sign (for negative
values), a floating decimal point (if applicable), and eight positions for the
Meter Response Examples:
1. Node address = 17, full field response, Counter A = 875
17 CTA
875 <CR><LF>
2. Node address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 1 = -250.5
SP1
-250.5<CR><LF>
3. Node address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 1 = 250, last line of block
print
250<CR><LF><SP><CR><LF>
14
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Command Response Time
At the beginning of time interval t3, the meter responds with the first
character of the reply. As with t1, the time duration of t3 is dependent on the
number of characters and baud rate of the channel. At the end of t3, the meter is
ready to receive the next command.
The meter can only receive data or transmit data at any one time (half-duplex
operation). During RS232 transmissions, the meter ignores commands while
transmitting data, but instead uses RXD as a busy signal. When sending
commands and data to the meter, a delay must be imposed before sending
another command. This allows enough time for the meter to process the
command and prepare for the next command.
At the start of the time interval t1, the computer program prints or writes the
string to the com port, thus initiating a transmission. During t1, the command
characters are under transmission and at the end of this period, the command
terminating character (* or $) is received by the meter. The time duration of t1
is dependent on the number of characters and baud rate of the channel.
t3 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
The maximum serial throughput of the meter is limited to the sum of the
times t1, t2 and t3.
t1 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
At the start of time interval t2, the meter starts the interpretation of the
command and when complete, performs the command function. This time
interval t2 varies. If no response from the meter is expected, the meter is ready
to accept another command.
If the meter is to reply with data, the time interval t2 is controlled by the use
of the command terminating character. The ‘*’ terminating character results in
a response time of 50 msec. minimum. This allows sufficient time for the
release of the sending driver on the RS485 bus. Terminating the command line
with ‘$’ results in a response time (t2) of 2 msec. minimum. The faster response
time of this terminating character requires that sending drivers release within 2
msec. after the terminating character is received.
Timing Diagram Figure
Communication Format
Start Bit and Data Bits
Data is transferred from the meter through a serial communication channel.
In serial communications, the voltage is switched between a high and low level
at a predetermined rate (baud rate) using ASCII encoding. The receiving device
reads the voltage levels at the same intervals and then translates the switched
levels back to a character. The voltage level conventions depend on the interface
standard. The table lists the voltage levels for each standard.
LOGIC
INTERFACE STATE
RS232*
RS485*
1
mark (idle)
TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V
a-b < -200 mV
0
space (active)
TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V
a-b > +200 mV
Data transmission always begins with the start bit. The start bit signals the
receiving device to prepare for reception of data. One bit period later, the least
significant bit of the ASCII encoded character is transmitted, followed by the
remaining data bits. The receiving device then reads each bit position as they are
transmitted.
Parity Bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The CUB5 meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and
sets the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.
* Voltage levels at the Receiver
Data is transmitted one byte at a time with a variable idle period between
characters (0 to ∞). Each ASCII character is “framed” with a beginning start bit,
an optional parity bit and one or more ending stop bits. The data format and
baud rate must match that of other equipment in order for communication to
take place. The figures list the data formats employed by the meter.
Stop Bit
The last character transmitted is the stop bit. The stop bit provides a single bit
period pause to allow the receiver to prepare to re-synchronize to the start of a
new transmission (start bit of next byte). The receiver then continuously looks
for the occurrence of the start bit. If 7 data bits and no parity is selected, then 2
stop bits are sent from the meter.
Character Frame Figure
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Company warrants the products it manufactures against defects in materials and workmanship for a period limited to two years from the date of shipment,
provided the products have been stored, handled, installed, and used under proper conditions. The Company’s liability under this limited warranty shall extend only
to the repair or replacement of a defective product, at The Company’s option. The Company disclaims all liability for any affirmation, promise or representation with
respect to the products.
The customer agrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from, defend, and indemnify RLC against damages, claims, and expenses arising out of subsequent sales
of RLC products or products containing components manufactured by RLC and based upon personal injuries, deaths, property damage, lost profits, and other matters
which Buyer, its employees, or sub-contractors are or may be to any extent liable, including without limitation penalties imposed by the Consumer Product Safety
Act (P.L. 92-573) and liability imposed upon any person pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act (P.L. 93-637), as now in effect or as amended hereafter.
No warranties expressed or implied are created with respect to The Company’s products except those expressly contained herein. The Customer acknowledges the
disclaimers and limitations contained herein and relies on no other warranties or affirmations.
15
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Press and hold SEL key to
enter Programming Mode.
CUB5 PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW
16
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Bulletin No. BMK11-X
Drawing No. LP0761
Effective 6/08
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion.net
MODEL BMK11 – CUB5 OR MLPS DIN RAIL BASE MOUNT ADAPTER KIT
DESCRIPTION
The model BMK11 can be used to mount a CUB5 meter or a Micro Line
Power Supply (MLPS) in various applications. Need a DIN rail mounted
display? Simply add the DIN rail clips to the back of the BMK11, install your
meter and snap it on the rail. If your application requires an inexpensive power
supply, simply mount an MLPS to the BMK11 and snap it to the rail. For base
mount application, just use the appropriate mounting screws to securely fasten
the BMK11. Nothing could be easier.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
BMK11
DESCRIPTION
CUB5 or MLPS DIN Rail Base Mount Kit
PART NUMBER
BMK11000
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
BMK11 WITHOUT UNIT
BMK11 WITH MLPS
BMK11 WITH CUB5
1
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
CUB5 INSTALLATION
1. Remove the panel latch (mounting clip) from the indicator. Insert the
indicator into the BMK11 per diagram at right. Verify indicator is fully
seated and latches have engaged. With latches properly engaged the
indicator will not pull out of the BMK11.
2. Wire the indicator.
3. For DIN RAIL mounting, insert the two plastic feet as shown in the diagram
at right. Angle the assembly so that the top groove of both rail feet are
located over the top lip of the rail. Rotate the assembly towards the rail until
it snaps into place.
4. To remove the assembly from the rail, place a screwdriver behind one of the
rail feet and draw the rail foot away from the rail disengaging it from the rail.
Apply the same procedure to the second rail foot and remove the complete
assembly from the rail.
5. For Base Mount, use the holes indicated in the diagram at right, and screw
or bolt the assembly to the desired mounting surface. User is responsible for
selecting the appropriate screw or bolt to provide mounting to the desired
surface. Base mount holes in the BMK11 are designed for #8 hardware.
6. To remove the indicator from the BMK11, slide a small screwdriver into the
slot provided in the latch. Draw the latch away from the indicator until
disengaged. Repeat the procedure on the other side. Once the latches are
released, remove the indicator from the BMK11.
MLPS INSTALLATION
1. Using the two nuts supplied with the BMK11, affix standoffs from MLPS
hardware pack as indicated in the diagram at left.
2. Snap the MLPS over the standoffs into the BMK11 as indicated in the diagram.
3. Attach the MLPS to the standoffs using the square washers and SEMS terminal
screws included with MLPS hardware pack.
4. Assembly can be wired at this time, or after the mounting is completed.
5. For DIN RAIL mounting, insert the two plastic feet as shown in the diagram.
Angle the assembly so that the top groove of both rail feet are located over the
top lip of the rail. Rotate the assembly towards the rail until it snaps into place.
6. For Base Mount, use the holes indicated in the diagram at left, and screw or
bolt the assembly to the desired mounting surface. User is responsible for
selecting the appropriate screw or bolt to provide mounting to the desired
surface. Base mount holes in BMK11 are designed for #8 hardware.
7. To remove the MLPS from the BMK11, slide a small screwdriver between the
MLPS and the latch wall. Draw the latch away from the MLPS until
disengaged. Repeat procedure on the other side. Once latches are released
remove the MLPS from the BMK11.
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Company warrants the products it manufactures against defects in materials and workmanship for a period limited to two years
from the date of shipment, provided the products have been stored, handled, installed, and used under proper conditions. The
Company’s liability under this limited warranty shall extend only to the repair or replacement of a defective product, at The
Company’s option. The Company disclaims all liability for any affirmation, promise or representation with respect to the products.
The customer agrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from, defend, and indemnify RLC against damages, claims, and expenses
arising out of subsequent sales of RLC products or products containing components manufactured by RLC and based upon personal
injuries, deaths, property damage, lost profits, and other matters which Buyer, its employees, or sub-contractors are or may be to
any extent liable, including without limitation penalties imposed by the Consumer Product Safety Act (P.L. 92-573) and liability
imposed upon any person pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act (P.L. 93-637), as now in effect or as amended hereafter.
No warranties expressed or implied are created with respect to The Company’s products except those expressly contained herein.
The Customer acknowledges the disclaimers and limitations contained herein and relies on no other warranties or affirmations.
Red Lion Controls AP
Red Lion Controls
20 Willow Springs Circle
Red Lion Controls BV
Printerweg 10
Unit 101, XinAn Plaza
Building 13, No.99 Tianzhou Road
York PA 17406
NL - 3821 AD Amersfoort
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Tel +31 (0) 334 723 225
Tel +86 21 6113-3688
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
Fax +31 (0) 334 893 793
Fax +86 21 6113-3683
ShangHai, P.R. China 200223
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Bulletin No. GEM1/2-D
Drawing No. LP0319
Released 8/02
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion-controls.com
GEMINI 1000/2000 - 6-DIGIT PRESETTABLE COUNTERS OR RATE INDICATORS
GEMINI 1000 - SINGLE LEVEL & GEMINI 2000 - DUAL LEVEL w/OPTIONAL 20 mA CURRENT LOOP
!
6-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED DISPLAY WITH NEGATIVE
SIGN & OVERFLOW INDICATORS
!
FUNCTIONS AS COUNTER OR RATE INDICATOR
!
INPUT SCALING FOR BUILT-IN RATE MULT./DIV.
!
ACCEPTS INPUT COUNT RATES UP TO 10 KHz
!
BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL
!
QUADRATURE SENSING (Up to 4 times resolution)
!
ANTI-COINCIDENCE ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION
!
SEPARATE INPUT FOR MAGNETIC PICKUPS
!
SOLID-STATE CURRENT SINK OUTPUT(S)
!
SEALED FRONT PANEL CONSTRUCTION (NEMA 4/IP65)
!
OPTIONAL RELAY OUTPUTS (Field Replaceable)
!
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (E2PROM)
!
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT TIME DELAYS
!
ABILITY TO LOCK OUT FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS
!
UP TO THREE RIGHT-HAND “DUMMY ZEROS”
!
SIMPLIFIED FRONT PANEL FOR PROGRAMMING EASE
!
FULL PROGRAMMABILITY OF DECIMAL POINT LOCATION AND
LEADING ZERO BLANKING
transmit count and reset can also be performed. Various “Print Options” can be
selected to automatically interrogate the Count Value, Preset, or Scale Factor by
activating the “Print Request” terminal when a printer is being used, or by
sending a “transmit per Print Options” (P) command. All command codes and
numerical data are sent in ASCII.
The construction of the Gemini 1000/2000 features a zinc die-cast bezel
offering maximum durability with a high quality appearance. The sealed front
panel meets NEMA 4/IP65 specifications, for wash-down and/or dust when
properly installed. Electrical connections are made via pluggable terminal strips
at the rear of the unit. Clamp-type pressure plate terminals accept stripped #14
AWG wire without lugs.
DESCRIPTION
The Gemini 1000 and 2000 offer the features and performance of a
single/dual level preset counter or a programmable sample time rate indicator
in one economically priced package. The reliability of solid-state MOS
technology coupled with the flexibility of user programmable functions makes
these units ideally suited to handle practically any preset control application.
As a counter, the Gemini 1000/2000 offers a choice of six (6) programmable
counting modes to cover Bi-directional, Anti- Coincidence, and Quadrature
applications. The input circuitry is switch selectable to accept signals from a
wide variety of sources. In addition, the unit may be programmed to register
counts on both edges of the input signal thus providing frequency doubling
capability. The choice of several reset cycle modes along with the compatibility
of count and control inputs to other RLC products, provides added versatility
for both stand-alone and systems counter needs.
As a rate indicator, the Gemini 1000/2000 features crystal-controlled
accuracy along with a variety of data sampling times to allow the needed
resolution for precision applications. The combination of 5-digit scale factor
and decade scale multipliers provide a wide range of scaling correction for
direct readout in terms of units being measured.
The Gemini 2000 20 mA Current Loop Option provides the capability of
two-way communications between the Gemini 2000 and a variety of
equipment, such as a printer, remote terminal, or host computer. The Baud rate
can be set to 300, 600, 1200 or 2400 baud. The format for transmitted and
received data is 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 parity bit (odd), and 1 stop bit. When
utilizing an external power supply (30 VDC max), up to 16 units can be
installed in the loop, each with an individual address. When utilizing the
Gemini’s 20 mA current source, up to seven units can be installed in a loop. The
Count value, Scale Factor, and Preset values can be interrogated. The Scale
factor and Presets can be changed by sending the proper command codes and
numerical Data. Other functions such as resetting the count, and a combined
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 6-digit 0.56" (14.2 mm) High LED display.
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC Power: Switch selectable 115/230 VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz, 20 VA
DC Power: 11 to 14 VDC @ 0.7 A max.
3. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC (±25%) @ 100 mA max.
4. MEMORY: Non-volative E2PROM memory retains all programming
information and count value when power is removed or interrupted.
5. INPUTS A & B: Switch selectable to accept count pulses from a variety of
sources including switch contacts, outputs from CMOS or TTL circuits, and
all standard RLC sensors.
Current Sourcing - Unit provides 3.9 KΩ pull-down load for sensors with
current sourcing outputs. Max. input voltage = 28 VDC @ 7 mA.
Current Sinking - Unit provides 7.8 KΩ pull-up load for sensors with
current sinking outputs. Max. sensor current = 1.6 mA.
Debounce - Damping capacitor provided for switch contact debounce.
Limits count speed to 100 Hz max. with 50% duty cycle.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 6.8" (173 mm) W.
1
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
FREQUENCY DOUBLING
Registers counts on both edges of input signal.
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS
UNIT PERSONALITY
Functions as a Counter and Rate Indicator.
DECIMAL POINT & LEADING ZERO BLANKING
Decimal point programmable to desired location. Leading zero blanking,
when selected, begins with second digit to the left of the decimal point.
PRESET(S)
Range 0 to ±999999
RIGHT-HAND DUMMY ZEROS
Up to three non-functional zeros may be placed on the least significant end
of the display.
SCALE FACTORS
5-digit input scaling, Range 0.0000 to ±5.9999.
SCALE MULTIPLIER
Multiplies the contents of the 9-digit internal counter by a factor of 1, 0.1, 0.01,
or 0.001 to view the desired number of significant digits on the 6-digit display.
OUTPUT TERMINATION MODES
Terminate at “other” Output Start (Gemini 2000 only)
Terminate at “other” Output End (Gemini 2000 only)
Terminate at Manual Reset
Terminate at Manual Reset End
Terminate after Time Delay
Boundary
For positive preset value: Output terminates when Display is less than
Preset.
For negative preset value: Output terminates when Display is greater than
Preset (i.e. more positive).
Note: In any of the above modes, the unit may be programmed for “Reverse
Phase” operation which complements the logic state of the output.
COUNTING MODES
Count with Inhibit
Count with Up/Down Control
2-Input Anti-Coincidence Add
2-Input Anti-Coincidence Add/Subtract
Quadrature
Quadrature X4
RESET ACTION
Reset-to-Zero; Output activates when count equals the preset value. Counter
returns to zero when reset.
Reset-to-Preset; Output activates when count equals zero. Counter returns to
preset value when reset.
OUTPUT TIME DELAY
Programmable from 0.01 to 599.99 seconds. Accurate to ±(0.01% + 10 msec.).
SAMPLE TIME MULTIPLIER
Multiplies the basic one-second data sampling time by 1, 2, 5, 10,
20, or 50. Accurate to ±0.01%.
RESET MODES
Manual Reset
Automatic Reset at Preset
Automatic Reset after Output Time Delay
Note: Manual reset via front panel pushbutton or remote “RST.” terminal can
be programmed for momentary or maintained action. Front panel reset may
be disabled by a switch at the rear of the unit.
FRONT PANEL LOCKOUT MODES
When the “Program Disable” control input is activated, the ability to change
front panel programmed functions will be prevented as per the following modes:
Complete Front Panel Disable
Preset(s) Enabled Only
Scale Factor Enabled Only
Both Preset(s) and Scale Factor Enabled
Note: Reset may be enabled or disabled in any of the above modes.
SELF-TEST
Performs a complete check on the display and output circuitry along with a
functional check on the CPU. Self-test is non-destructive and may be
performed during a process without losing counts.
10. OUTPUT(S):
Solid-State - Current sinking NPN Open Collector Transistor(s). ISNK = 100
mA max. VOH = 30 VDC max. (Internal Zener Diode Protected). VOL =
1 VDC max @ 100 mA
Relay(s) - Mounted on a field-replaceable P.C. board. Form C contacts rated
5 amps @ 120/240 VAC, 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120 VAC
(inductive load). The operate time is 5 msec nominal and the release time
is 3 msec nominal.
Relay Life Expectancy - 100,000 cycles at max. rating. (As load level
decreases, life expectancy increases.)
Programmable Timed Outputs(s) - The timed output(s) can be set from
0.01 to 599.99 seconds, ±(0.01% + 10 msec).
11. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4 Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY:
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact 1
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
2 Kv power 2
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
Lo Bias - Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max., VIH = 3.75 V.
Hi Bias - Input trigger levels VIL = 5.5 V max., VIH = 7.5 V.
Note: Bias levels given are ±10% @ 12 VDC. They vary proportionally with
sensor supply voltage.
6. MAGNETIC PICKUP INPUT:
Sensitivity - 150 mV peak nominal
Hysteresis - 100 mV nominal
Input Impedance - 26.5 KΩ @ 60 Hz nominal
Maximum Input Voltage - ±50 V peak
7. MAXIMUM COUNT RATES:
Uni- or Bi-Directional Modes: 9 KHz; 8 KHz (X2)
2-Input Anti-Coincidence Modes: 5 KHz; 4 KHz (X2)
Quadrature Modes: 5 KHz; 4 KHz (X2 or X4)
Rate Indicator: 10 KHz; 8 KHz (X2)
8. CONTROL INPUTS:
Reset - Active Low (VIL = 1.5 V max.) internally pulled up to +12 VDC
(ISNK = 3 mA), response time = 10 msec (typical).
Program Disable - Active Low (VIL = 1.5 V max.), internally pulled up to
+5 VDC (ISNK = 1 mA).
Print Request - (GEM2 only) Active Low (VIL = 1.5 V max.) internally
pulled up to +5 VDC (ISNK = 1 mA).
9. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS (Optional, Gemini 2000 only):
Type - Bi-directional 20 mA current loop, 20 mA source provided. (Powers
up to seven units in a loop with internal current source.)
Baud Rate - Programmable 300 to 2400.
Maximum Address - 16 units (0 to 15). (Actual number in a single loop is
limited by serial hardware specifications.)
Data Format - 10 bit frame, Odd parity (one start bit, 7 data bits, one odd
parity bit, and one stop bit.)
Serial Hardware Specifications SO - Output Transistor Rating: VMAX = 30 VDC, VSAT = 1 VMAX @ 20
mA. (Can address 16 units in a loop)
SI - Input Diode Rating: VF = 1.25 VTYP; 1.5 VMAX
Note: The compliance voltage rating of the source must be greater than
the sum of the voltage drops around the loop.
2
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
To change the Unit Personality to Counter mode,
Press “1”:
Unit displays the new mode identifier (Counter).
Notes:
1. Metal bezel of unit connected with ground lead from rear bezel screw to
metal mounting panel.
2. When the unit is DC powered, a power line filter (RLC# LFIL0000 or
equivalent) was installed, so as not to impair the function of the unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
12. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
13. CONSTRUCTION:
Metal die-cast bezel, plastic case. This unit is rated for NEMA 4/IP65 indoor
use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2
14. WEIGHT: 2.1 lbs. (0.9 kg)
Press “E”:
Unit enters new mode and returns display to the present
count value.
The most commonly used functions, Preset(s) and Scale Factor, are
initialized through single front panel pushbuttons rather than a two-digit
function code. Pressing the “P” or “SF” pushbuttons will immediately display
the current Preset or Scale Factor value for the selected display. To change any
digit, the user presses the pushbutton directly below that particular digit, which
is then scrolled until the desired value is obtained. Each digit is changed, if
necessary, in the same manner until the complete Preset or Scale Factor value is
registered on the display. Pressing the “E” pushbutton completes the entry
sequence.
To interrogate the Preset value, Press “P”:
Unit displays current Preset value.
PROGRAMMING
The Gemini 1000/2000 input circuit set-up is programmed using DIP
switches on the rear of the unit. All other functions are programmed through the
front panel pushbuttons.
To program or interrogate a function, the user first enters a two-digit function
code. The unit will then display that function code along with a single-digit
representing the present mode of operation. Programming changes are made by
changing the single-digit mode identifier.
To change the Preset value:
Any digit may be changed by pressing the pushbutton
directly below it. Release the pushbutton when the digit
reaches the desired value.
Press “E”:
Unit enters new Preset value and returns display to the
present count.
EXAMPLE: The function code representing the “Unit Personality” is 41. The
mode identifiers for this function are:
Counter (1) and Rate Indicator (2).
To interrogate the Unit Personality, Press “41”:
Unit displays function code along with mode identifier
(Rate Indicator).
TYPICAL COUNTER APPLICATIONS
“IN PROCESS” MONITORING SYSTEM
Some applications require continuous monitoring of items “in-process”. In this example, a
material processing system is equipped with an in-feed photo-electric scanner to count raw parts
going into the system, and an out-feed scanner to count finished parts leaving the machine. The
number of parts between the in-feed and out-feed is displayed by the GEMINI 1000 operating
in the Anti-Coincidence Add/Subtract mode. In this mode, counts applied to INPUT A are
added while counts applied to INPUT B are subtracted.
Before start-up, the system is completely empty of parts and the counter is reset to zero.
When the operation begins, raw parts move through the in-feed scanner field of view with each
part generating an “up” count. After processing, finished parts appearing at the out-feed scanner
generate “down” counts so the counter continuously displays the number of “in-process” parts.
The GEMINI 1000 preset value is set to the maximum system capacity and the output is used
to control power to the system drive. Therefore, if a jam-up occurs within the system and the
maximum capacity is reached, the counter output will shut down the system drive until the
problem can be corrected.
Conversely, the counter could be used in the Reset-to-Preset mode which delivers an output
at zero. If the supply of raw parts is interrupted, the system will eventually empty and the
counter will reach zero. At this point, the counter output will shut down the system drive until
the supply of raw parts is replenished.
“CUT-TO-LENGTH” WITH FLAW DETECTION
In this application, sheets of material are to be cut to length as per customer order with any
flaws being corrected by the vendor. Sales are both domestic and foreign and require lengths to
be measured in either yards or meters.
A rotary pulse generator (RPG) with a 10 pulse/revolution (PPR) quadrature output is
coupled to a length sensor conversion bracket with a 4/10 yard wheel. The GEMINI 1000 is set
up in the Quadrature x4 mode which effectively increases the RPG output to 40 PPR. With the
4/10 yard wheel, the information rate becomes 100 pulses/yard and allows the material to be cut
to the nearest 1/100 yard. The counter display is programmed for two decimal places to provide
a readout in 1/100 yard increments.
The Preset value on the GEMINI 1000 is set to the desired length of material and the output
is used to control power to the cutting knife. The counter is programmed to automatically reset
to zero at the preset value which allows the process to run continuously without losing counts.
If a flaw is detected, a contact in the flaw detector is used to shut down power to the system
drive allowing the material to be “backed-up” to the point at which the flaw occurred. As the
material is rewound, the counter will count “down” to maintain a readout of the total length of
material “in-process”.For metric orders, the scale factor on the GEMINI 1000 is set to 0.9144
which provides the conversion from yards to meters (1 yard = 0.9144 meters). Otherwise, all
equipment and settings remain as above.
3
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
TYPICAL COUNTER APPLICATIONS (Cont’d)
TYPICAL RATE INDICATOR APPLICATION
COIL WINDING MACHINE CONTROL W/REMOTE PRINTING
RATE INDICATION WITH SPEED LIMITING
This application depicts a GEMINI 2000 controlling a coil winding machine.
A length sensor provides output units in feet. Output 1 is used as the slow-down
for the drive motor and Output 2 is used for the cut off knife control. A printer is
used to record the length of each coil that is wound. Preset 1 is set to the slow
down length and Preset 2 is set to the desired length of the coil.
In this application, a GEMINI 1000 is used to indicate the speed of a
printing press operation in feet/minute, while limiting the maximum speed
to a desirable level.
A magnetic pickup is used to sense a gear coupled to a feed roll on the
system drive. The scale factor on the GEMINI 1000 is set to provide a direct
readout in feet/minute with a one-second sample time.
The maximum allowable speed of the operation is entered as the preset
value on the rate indicator. The output termination is programmed for the
“boundary” mode in which the output remains “OFF” as long as the speed
of the operation stays below the preset level. If the operational speed equals
or exceeds the maximum allowable limit, the output will turn “ON” and
remain “ON” until the speed is reduced below the preset value.
The output of the GEMINI 1000 is tied to the speed control circuitry of
the system drive and triggers the necessary speed reduction if the maximum
allowable rate is exceeded. The jumper between the “Program Disable” and
“Common” terminals is used to prevent any accidental or unauthorized
programming changes. Connecting the jumper after the unit set-up is
complete will allow full interrogation of front panel functions, although any
function alteration will be inhibited.
ORDERING INFORMATION
OPTIONS
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION
GEM1
GEM2
GEM2
_
Gemini 1000
Gemini 2000
Gemini 1000 Relay Board
PART NUMBERS FOR AVAILABLE
SUPPLY VOLTAGES
W/RELAY
BOARD
W/20 mA
CURRENT LOOP
Yes
No
GEM10060
Yes
No
GEM20060
Yes
Yes
GEM20160
N/A
N/A
RLYBD000
115/230 VAC
_
Gemini 2000 Relay Board
N/A
N/A
RLYBD002
For more information on Pricing, Enclosures, & Panel Mount Kits, refer to the RLC Catalog or contact
your local RLC distributor.
4
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
7
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Bulletin No. GEM4-B
Drawing No. LP0320
Released 8/02
Tel +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax +1 (717) 764-0839
www.redlion-controls.com
GEMINI 4100/4200 - 6-DIGIT PRESETTABLE COUNTER/RATE OR DUAL COUNTER INDICATORS
GEMINI 4100 - SINGLE LEVEL & GEMINI 4200 - DUAL LEVEL
!
6-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED DISPLAY WITH NEGATIVE
SIGN OVERFLOW & DISPLAYED VALUE INDICATORS
!
TWO DISPLAY CHANNELS: A[rate or count], B[count]
!
SEPARATE INPUT SCALING FOR BOTH CHANNELS
ACCEPTS COUNT RATES TO 10 KHz
!
BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DN CONTROL
!
QUADRATURE SENSING (Up to 4 times resolution)
!
SOLID-STATE CURRENT SINK OUTPUT(S)
!
OUTPUT(S) ASSIGNABLE TO EITHER CHANNEL
!
CSA CERTIFIED (FILE #LR67285) [115/230 VAC Versions]
!
OPTIONAL 20 mA CURRENT LOOP FOR SERIAL DATA
COMMUNICATION
!
RELAY OUTPUT(S) (Field Replaceable)
!
PROGRAMMABLE TIMED OUTPUT(S) (0.01 to 599.99 sec.)
!
ABILITY TO LOCK OUT FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS
!
SEALED FRONT PANEL CONSTRUCTION (NEMA 4/IP65)
!
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (E2PROM)
!
PROGRAMMABILITY OF DECIMAL POINT LOCATION & LEADING
ZERO BLANKING
At slower rates, averaging can be accomplished by programming the “Rate
Minimum Update Time” (0.5 sec. to 16 sec.) for the desired response. The
minimum input frequency is 0.03 counts/sec. or one pulse every 32 seconds.
Extensive scaling capabilities allow practically any desired reading at very slow
input rates.
The output(s) can be assigned to either the Rate or Count channel, or one
output to each. When programmed as a Dual Counter, both outputs can be
assigned to Counter B or Output 1 to Counter A and Output 2 to Counter B.
The 20 mA Current Loop Communications Option provides the capability of
two-way serial communications between the Gemini and a variety of
equipment, such as a printer, remote terminal, programmable controller, or host
computer. The baud rate can be set to 300, 600, 1200, or 2400 baud. The format
for transmitted and received data is 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 parity bit (odd) and
1 stop bit. When utilizing an external power supply (30 VDC max), up to sixteen
units can be installed in the loop, each with an individual address. When
utilizing the Gemini’s 20 mA current source, up to seven units can be installed
in a loop. The Preset and Scale Factor can be changed by sending the proper
command codes and numerical data to the unit. Other functions, such as
resetting the various counters, can also be performed. Various “Print Options”
can be selected to automatically interrogate the Count Values, Presets, and Scale
Factor by activating the “Print Request” terminal or by sending a “Transmit
Per Print Option” (P) command.
The construction of the Gemini 4000 Series features a metal die-cast bezel
offering maximum durability with a high quality appearance. The sealed front
panel meets NEMA 4/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dust when
properly installed. Electrical connections are made via plug-in terminal strips.
Clamp-type pressure plate terminals accept stripped #14 AWG wire without lugs.
DESCRIPTION
The Gemini 4100 and 4200 offer the features of a single (4100) or dual
(4200) level, dual function Counter and Rate instrument or Dual Counter
instrument in one economically priced package. The Gemini 4000 Series is
ideally suited for applications where rate and count indication or control of a
process is desired or where batching and totalizing is needed.
The reliability of solid-state MOS technology coupled with the flexibility of
user programmability makes these units suited to handle practically any preset
control application.
There are two signal inputs to which the count or count control signals for
both channels are applied. The Gemini can operate under any one of six input
response modes: Count with Inhibit, Count with Up/Dn Control, AntiCoincidence Add/Subtract, Separate Input mode, or Quadrature modes. As a
Counter/Rate instrument, the rate indicator will utilize the same count signal
input as the counter except when in “Separate Input” mode, where the rate
channel will use one input and the counter channel the other. As a dual counter
instrument, both counters will utilize the signal inputs in the same manner. In
other words, in all modes except the “Separate Input” mode, a count pulse
applied to the input will affect both counters in the same manner.
The choice of several reset cycle modes along with the compatibility of count
and control inputs to other RLC products, provides added versatility for both
stand-alone and system counter needs.
The Rate Indicator portion uses a time interval method (1/tau) to calculate the
rate value. This method enables high resolution at all input rates. The unit
counts input pulses and after a programmable minimum update time has
occurred, it waits until the next count edge occurs, then takes the elapsed time
and number of edges and calculates the rate value.
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
!
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 6.8" (173 mm) W.
1
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
12. OUTPUT(S):
Solid-State: Current sinking NPN Open Collector Transistor(s). ISNK = 100
mA max. @ VCE = 1 V. VOH = 30 VDC max. (Internal Zener Diode
Protection).
Relays: Mounted on a field-replaceable PC board. Form C contacts rated at
5 amps @ 120/240 VAC, 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120 VAC
(inductive load). The operate time is 5 msec nominal and the release time
is 3 msec nominal.
Relay Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles @ max. rating. (As load level
decreases, life expectancy increase.)
Programmed Timed Output: The timed output can be set from 0.01 to
599.99 seconds, ±(0.01% + 10 msec)
13. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY:
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4 Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact 1
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power 2
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 6-Digit 0.56" (14.2 mm) High LED display
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC Versions:
AC Power: Switch selectable 115/230 VAC, (±10%), 50/60 Hz, 20 VA.
DC Power: 11 to 14 VDC @ 0.7 amp max.
DC Versions:
DC Power: +24 VDC (±10%) @ 0.7 amp max.
3. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC (±25%) @ 100 mA.
Note: The sensor supply voltage varies ±25% due to line and internal load
variations. All RLC sensors will accommodate this variation.
4. MEMORY: Non-volative E2PROM memory retains all programming
information and count values (except Counter Load Values) when power is
removed or interrupted.
Power Cycles: 100,000 min.
Data Retention: 10 years min.
5. INPUTS 1 AND 2: Switch selectable to accept count pulses from a variety
of sources including switch contacts, outputs from CMOS or TTL circuits,
and all standard RLC sensors.
Current Sourcing: Unit provides 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor for sensors with
current sourcing outputs. Max. input voltage = 28 VDC @ 7 mA.
Current Sinking: Unit provides 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor for sensors with
current sinking outputs. Max. sensor current = 1.6 mA.
Debounce: Damping capacitor provides for switch contact debounce. Limits
count speed to 100 Hz max. with 50% duty cycle.
Lo Bias: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V, VIH = 3.75 V.
Hi Bias: Input trigger levels VIL = 5.5 V, VIH = 7.5 V.
Note: Bias levels given are ±10% @ 12 VDC. These levels vary
proportionally with sensor supply voltage at “DC OUT” terminal.
6. MAGNETIC PICKUP INPUT:
Sensitivity: 150 mV peak (typical @ 12 VDC)
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input Impedance: 26.5 KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum Input Voltage: ±50 V peak
7. RATE ACCURACY AND REPEATABILITY: 0.012%
8. RATE MINIMUM INPUT FREQUENCY: 0.03 Hz
Note: At frequecies below 0.03 Hz (1 pulse every 32 sec.) the rate display will
go to zero).
9. MAXIMUM COUNT RATES:
MODE
COUNTER/RATE MODE [41 1]
X1
Uni or Bi-directional
Anti-Coincidence Add/Subtract
Separate Input
Quadrature
MODE
10 KHz
4 KHz
8 KHz
5 KHz
DUAL COUNTER MODE [41 2]
X1
Uni or Bi-directional
Anti-Coincidence Add/Subtract
Separate Input
Quadrature
9 KHz
5 KHz
7.5 KHz
4.5 KHz
X2
X4
5 KHz
2.5 KHz
4 KHz
4.5 KHz
2.5 KHz
X2
X4
4.5 KHz
2.5 KHz
3.5 KHz
4 KHz
2.5 KHz
Notes:
1. Metal bezel of unit connected with ground from rear bezel screw to metal
mounting panel.
2.When the unit is DC powered, a power line filter (RLC# LFIL0000 or
equivalent) was installed, so as not to impair the function of the unit.
Refer to the EMC Compliance Installation section of the manual for
additional information.
14. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
15. CONSTRUCTION:
Metal die-cast bezel, plastic case. This unit is rated for NEMA 4/IP65 indoor
use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2
16. WEIGHT: 2.1 lbs. (0.9 kg)
10. CONTROL INPUTS:
Reset: Active low (VIL = 1.5 V max.) internally pulled up to +12 VDC (ISNK
= 3 mA), activation and de-activation response time = 10 msec.
Program Disable: Active low (VIL = 1.5 V max.) internally pulled up to +5
VDC (ISNK = 1 mA).
Print Request: Active low (VIL = 1.5 V max.) internally pulled up to +5
VDC (ISNK = 1 mA).
11. SERIAL COMMUNICTIONS (Optional):
Type: Bi-directional 20 mA current loop, 20 mA source provided. (Powers
up to 7 units in a loop with internal current source.)
Baud Rate: Programmable 300 to 2400
Maximum Address: 16 units. (Actual number in a single loop is limited by
serial hardware specifications.)
Data Format: 10 bit frame, Odd parity (one start bit, 7 data bits, one odd
parity bit, and one stop bit.)
Serial Hardware Specifications:
SO - Output Transistor Rating: VMAX = 30 VDC, VSAT = 1VMAX @ 20
mA.
SI - Input Diode Rating: VF = 1.25 VTYP; 1.5 VMAX.
Note: The compliance voltage rating of the source must be greater than
the sum of the voltage drops around the loop.
2
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
RATE UPDATE TIME
“Rate Minimum Update Time” is programmable from 0.5 to 16 seconds
which allows averaging capability for non-consistent pulse spacing. Rate
maximum update time will vary with the minimum update time selected.
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS
UNIT PERSONALITY
Functions as a Counter and Rate Indicator or as two counters.
PRESET(S)
Range 0 to ±999999
RATE CONVERSION FACTOR
Provides easy display conversion for readout in Rate Per Second, Rate Per
Minute, or Rate Per Hour.
SCALE FACTORS
Separate 5-digit input scaling for each channel. Range ±0.0001 to 5.9999.
DECIMAL POINT & LEADING ZERO BLANKING
Decimal point programmable to desired location. Leading zero blanking,
when selected, begins with second digit to the left of the decimal point.
SCALE MULTIPLIER
Multiplies the actual count or rate input by 1, 0.1, 0.01, or 0.001 (counter) or
1000, 100, 10, 1, 0.1, 0.01 (rate), to view the desired number of significant
digits on the 6-digit display.
OUTPUT TERMINATION MODES
Terminate at “other” Output Start (Gemini 4200 only)
Terminate at “other” Output End (Gemini 4200 only)
Terminate at Manual Reset
Terminate at Manual Reset End
Terminate after Time Delay
Boundary
For positive preset value: Output terminates when Display is less than Preset.
For negative preset value: Output terminates when Display is greater than
Preset, (i.e. more positive). Negative preset values apply only to counter
mode.
Note: In any of the above modes, the unit may be programmed for “Reverse
Phase” operation which complements the logic state of the output.
INPUTS 1 & 2 RESPONSE MODES
Count (1) with Inhibit (2)
Count (1) with Up/Down Control (2)
2-Input Anti-Coincidence Add (1)/Subtract (2)
Separate Inputs
Quadrature
Quadrature X4
NUMBER OF COUNT EDGES
Register counts on one or both edges of input signal (counter only).
RESET ACTION
Reset-to-Zero; Output activates when count equals the preset value. Counter
returns to zero when reset.
Reset-to-Preset; Output activates when count equals zero. Counter returns to
preset when reset.
TIMED OUTPUT(S)
Programmable from 0.01 to 599.99 seconds.
Accurate to ±(0.01% + 10 msec.).
FRONT PANEL LOCKOUT MODES
When the “Program Disable” control input is activated, the ability to change
front panel programmed functions will be prevented as per the following modes:
Complete Front Panel Disabled
Preset(s) Enabled Only
Scale Factors Enabled Only
Preset(s) and Scale Factors Enabled
Preset(s) and Counter Load Enabled
Preset(s), Scale Factors, and Counter Load Enabled
Note: Manual Reset may be independently enabled or disabled in any of the
above modes.
RESET MODES
Manual Reset
Automatic Reset at Preset or Zero
Automatic Reset after Timed Output
Manual reset via front panel pushbutton or remote “RST.” terminal can be
programmed to act on one or both count channels with either momentary or
maintained action. A separate “RST. A” terminal is available to provide
independent reset of each channel. Front panel pushbutton reset may be
disabled by a switch at the rear of the unit.
COUNTER LOAD
Allows counter value(s) to be changed via the front panel.
SELF-TEST
Performs a complete check on the display and output circuitry along with a
functional check on the CPU. Self-test is non-destructive and may be
performed during a process without losing counts.
RATE RIGHT-HAND DUMMY ZEROS
Up to three non-functional zeros may be placed on the least significant end
of the display.
The most commonly used functions, Preset(s) and Scale Factors, are
initialized through single front panel pushbuttons rather than a two-digit function
code. Pressing the “P” or “SF” pushbuttons will immediately display the current
Preset or Scale Factor value for the selected display. To change any digit, the user
presses the pushbutton directly below that particular digit, which is then scrolled
until the desired value is obtained. Each digit is changed, if necessary, in the
same manner until the complete Preset or Scale Factor value is registered on the
display. Pressing the “E” pushbutton completes the entry sequence.
PROGRAMMING
The Gemini 4000 Series input circuit set-up is programmed using DIP
switches on the rear of the unit. All other functions are programmed through the
front panel pushbuttons.
To program or interrogate a function, the user first enters a two-digit function
code. The unit will then display that function code along with a single-digit
mode identifier.
EXAMPLE: The function code representing the “Inputs 1 & 2 Response
Modes” is 43. The mode identifiers for this function are:
1. Count with Inhibit
2. Count with Up/Down Control
3. 2-Input Anti-Coincidence Add/Subtract
4. Separate Inputs
5. Quadrature
6. Quadrature X4
To interrogate the Preset value, Press “P”:
Unit displays current Preset value.
To change the Preset value:
Any digit may be changed by pressing the pushbutton
directly below it. Release the pushbutton when the digit
reaches the desired value.
To interrogate the counting modes,
Press “4”, then “3”:
Unit displays the function code along with mode
identifier 1 (Count with Inhibit)
Press “E”:
Unit enters new Preset value and returns display to the
present selected display value.
To change the counting mode to “Count with Up/Dn
control”, Press “2”:
The Gemini 4000 Series can display either of two
selected display values as indicated by LEDs along the
left side of the display.
To enter and save the new mode, Press “E”:
Unit enters new mode and returns display to the present
selected display value.
To display a different count value:
Press the “DISP” pushbutton repeatedly until the
indicator corresponding to the desired value turns on.
3
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
TYPICAL COUNTER/RATE APPLICATION
COAL FEED RATE & USAGE INDICATION
An industrial plant has an in-house coal fired boiler which provides heating
and powers an electric generator used for secondary power. An auger feeds the
coal into the boiler furnace. The actual pressure of the boiler is controlled by
the feed rate of the auger. An indication is required when the feed rate falls
below or exceeds the desired RPM levels. The plant manager also wants an
indication of the amount of coal that is used. The normal desired auger
revolution rate is between 30 and 40 RPM. A shaft rotation speed of 30 RPM
is equal to a feed rate of 1.8 tons of coal per hour. Rate and usage indication
is to be in 10ths of tons per hour.
Since the application requires two presets (upper and lower limits) the
Gemini 4200 programmed as a Counter/Rate indicator is used. An LMPC can
be used to sense a bolt head located on the auger shaft. Both outputs of the
Gemini 4200 are assigned to the Rate channel. First the scaling required for
the counter will be calculated. At 30 RPM the pulse rate per minute is the same
since a single bolthead is being sensed once each revolution. Since it takes one
hour at 30 RPM to use 1.8 tons of coal, the number of pulses accumulated in
that hour will be 1800 (30 PPM x 60 min/hr = 1800). The Scale Factor needed
is 0.01 (SF = desired reading/# of pulses = 18/1800= 0.01). Since the same
information rate and desired reading applies to the rate indication, the same
Scale Factor value will be used. It is then only necessary to program the Rate
Conversion Factor for Rate per Hour. Both Presets are programmed for
boundary operation and the Relay outputs are connected to overspeed and
underspeed indicator lights.
TYPICAL DUAL COUNTER APPLICATION
PERCENTAGE OF USABLE PARTS VERSUS PARTS PRODUCED
number of rejected parts from a second photo sensor. A system computer
constantly monitors the two count values through the Gemini Serial
Communications Loop and performs the percentage calculation required.
The single preset output of the Gemini 4100 is assigned to count Channel B
and is set for the number of acceptable pieces required to fill the order. The preset
value could be entered by the operator through the front panel pushbuttons or
could be entered into the system computer and down loaded to the Gemini.
A manufacturer of molded plastic parts wants to track the percentage of
usable parts versus parts produced to determine if a defect has developed in the
mold or some other malfunction is occurring which requires corrective action.
From the molding press, parts pass through an inspection station and exit on
one of two conveyors depending on whether the part is accepted or rejected. A
Gemini 4100 programmed as a dual counter is used in the separate inputs
mode. Count Channel B tabulates the number of acceptable parts via a photo
sensor mounted on the conveyor. Likewise, count Channel A tabulates the
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
DESCRIPTION
GEM41
GEMINI 4100
GEM42
GEMINI 4200
-
Gemini 4100 Relay Board
Gemini 4200 Relay Board
w/20 mA
CURRENT LOOP
PART NUMBERS FOR
AVAILABLE SUPPLY VOLTAGES
24 VDC
115/230 VAC
No
Yes
No
Yes
N/A
N/A
GEM41030
GEM41060
GEM41130
GEM41160
GEM42030
GEM42060
GEM42130
GEM42160
RLYBD001
RLYBD002
For more information on Pricing. Enclosures, & Panel Mount Kits, refer to the RLC Catalog or contact your
local RLC distributor.
4
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
5
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
6
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
7
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
8
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
9
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
10
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
11
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
BULLETIN NO. LGPB/M-C
DRAWING NO. LP0328
REVISED 3/97
LEGEND PLUS SERIES MODEL LGPB - Four Preset Batch/Counter/Rate Indicator
MODEL LGPM - Six Preset Counter/Rate Indicator
MODEL LGPBF - Four Preset Foot-Inch Length Counter
l
2X8 TRANSMISSIVE LCD, NEGATIVE IMAGE, WITH L.E.D.
BACKLIGHTING
l
PROGRAMMABLE DISPLAY INTENSITY
l
OPTIONAL DUAL COLOR DISPLAY (Red and Green)
l
FOUR USER PROGRAMMABLE INDICATION DISPLAYS WITH
CUSTOMIZABLE MNEMONICS AND DISPLAY LINES
l
PROGRAMMABLE MESSAGE CAPABILITIES
l
ENGLISH PROGRAMMING MENUS
l
RS-485 OR RS-232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
l
OPTIONAL PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE FOR PROGRAMMING
MULTIPLE UNITS
l
ABILITY TO LOCKOUT OPERATOR ACCESS TO PROGRAMMING
PARAMETERS
l
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUTS
l
COUNT INPUTS ARE SWITCH SELECTABLE FOR VARIOUS
SENSOR OUTPUTS
l
BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL
l
QUADRATURE SENSING (Up to 4 times resolution)
l
COUNT INHIBIT TERMINAL AVAILABLE FOR ALL COUNT
MODES
l
ACCEPTS COUNT RATES UP TO 15 KHz
l
ALL OUTPUT(S) ASSIGNABLE TO COUNT OR RATE
l
ON & OFF DELAY FOR RATE OUTPUTS
l
SOLID STATE CURRENT SINKING OUTPUT(S)
l
RELAY OUTPUTS (LGPB only; Field Replaceable)
l
SEPARATE INPUT SCALING FOR RATE, COUNT, & TOTAL
l
115/230 VAC SWITCH SELECTABLE
l
NEMA4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT PANEL BEZEL
DESCRIPTION
The Legend Plus Series consists of two models that are multi-input count and
rate indicators. The LGPB features process, batch, and total counting, as well
as a time interval rate indicator. The four available presets can be assigned to
the process counter or the rate indicator. Outputs three and four can also be
assigned to the batch or total indicator. The Legend Plus foot-inch counter
provides Process and Total count read-outs in feet and inches. A decimal point
is used to separate the foot and inch units. All Process and Total presets are also
displayed in feet and inches. The LGPM features six presets, which can be
assigned to either the rate or count display.
The Legend Plus has advanced features which allow the units to be more
closely coupled to the application. The units feature a 2 line by 8 character
alpha-numeric display, allowing the value mnemonics and programming menus
to be easily read. The units are available in single or dual color display models.
The four scroll-through indication displays can be programmed to show various
parameters and automatically scroll, if desired. On dual color models, each
indication display can be programmed for either color. The mnemonics
corresponding to the main display values (RATE, PROCESS, BATCH,
TOTAL) can be individually programmed and modified as desired. For
example, the RATE mnemonic can be reprogrammed to display the word
SPEED, so that when the rate mnemonic is to be displayed, the mnemonic
SPEED is displayed instead.
Two custom display lines are available which enable the user to specify the
number of digits of a value to be displayed on the line, along with any alphanumeric prefix or suffix. This capability allows displays such as: ‘1000 RPM’,
‘99999 Ft’, ‘PRC 9999’, etc.
The Legend Plus also features messaging capabilities that can inform the
user of output actions or other events that occur in a system. Up to ten messages
can be programmed. Messages can be requested by an output status change,
user input(s), or through serial communications. The messages can be
programmed to blink, scroll, time out, and to alternately flash between message
and indication display.
DIMENSIONS “In inches (mm)”
and
UL Recognized Component,
File #E137808
On dual color models, the message can be programmed to be displayed in
either color.
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 3.0” (76.2)H x 4.0” (101.6)W.
PANEL CUT-OUT
216
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
SPECIFICATIONS
This capability is very useful in drawing the operator’s attention to particular
messages.
The program disable DIP switch, the code value, and an external user input
selected for Program Disable can be utilized to provide multi-level protection
against unwanted changes to data values and unit configuration.
The Legend Plus features enhanced serial communications. The serial port
can be configured for connection to RS-485 or RS-232 devices. It can be used
for data retrieval and for programming various data values.
Optional Legend Plus Programming Software for IBMÒ compatible PC’s is
available to program all the Legend configuration parameters, such as
messages, count modes, etc. The software allows unit configurations to be
created, uploaded, downloaded and saved to a file for rapid programming of the
Legend unit.
The six programmable User Inputs can be configured to provide a variety of
functions. Four user inputs are located on the upper rear terminal block and the
other two inputs are front panel function keys. The User Inputs can be
configured to provide functions such as:
1. DISPLAY: 2x8, 0.3” (7 mm) high characters, negative image transmissive
LCD, with Single (green or red) or Dual Color (green and red) LED
backlighting.
2. POWER:
AC Operation: 115/230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable.
DC Operation: +12 VDC ±20% @ 250 mA max.
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile memory retains all programming information.
Count and Preset values are written to non-volatile memory when power is
interrupted. All other programming parameters are written to memory when
programming mode is exited. If power is removed while in the programming
menu’s the parameters are stored to previously saved settings.
Data Retention: 10 yr. min.
Message/Mnemonics Memory:
792 (LGPB) / 804 (LGPM) bytes available (with factory settings loaded).
4. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC ±25% @ 100 mA.
5. INPUTS A and B: DIP Switch selectable to accept count pulses from a
variety of sources including switch contacts, outputs from CMOS or TTL
circuits, magnetic pickups and all standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 VMAX; VIH = 3.75 VMIN.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KW pull up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KW pull-down, 7.3 mAMAX @ 28 VDC.
Debounce: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce.
Limits count speed to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec min.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak.
Hysteresis: 100 mV.
Input impedance: 3.9 KW @ 60 Hz.
Maximum input voltage: ±50 Vp
Note: For magnetic pickup input, the sink/source DIP switch must be in the
SRC position.
6. RATE ACCURACY: ±0.01%
7. RATE MINIMUM INPUT FREQUENCY: 0.01Hz.
8. MAXIMUM COUNT RATE IN KHz:
Count Inhibit
Message Request
Output Activation
Program Disable
Print Request
Reset
Message Cancellation
Output Deactivation
View/Freeze Display
Skip Presets(outputs)
The units offer a choice of seven programmable counting modes for use in
applications requiring Bi-directional, Anti-coincidence, and Quadrature
counting. The count inhibit function can be utilized with all of these input
response modes by programming User Input 4 for the Inhibit Count function.
The input circuitry is switch selectable to accept signals from a variety of
sources. In the Anti-coincidence mode both inputs are monitored
simultaneously, so that no counts are missed, and the final count can be chosen
as the sum or difference of the two inputs.
Rate, Process and Total displays have separate scaling and decimal point
placement, for readouts in different units. The Counter Load feature enables the
operator to modify the count value. This is useful when flawed material has
been counted and it is necessary to adjust the count value accordingly.
The rate operates in the time interval method (1/tau) to calculate the rate
value. This method insures high resolution at all input rates. Averaging can be
accomplished by programming the Minimum and Maximum Update Time for
the desired response. Extensive scaling capabilities allow practically any
reading at very slow input rates.
The construction of the Legend Plus unit is a lightweight, high impact plastic
case with a clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with silicone rubber
keypad meets NEMA4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed. Plug-in style terminal blocks simplify
installation and wiring change-outs.
CNT + DIR
LGPB (Batch)
LGPM (Six Preset)
LGPBF (Foot-Inch)
X1
15
13
15
X2
7
6
7
QUAD
X1
7
6
7
X2
5.5
5
5.5
X4
3
2.5
3
ADD/ADD
ADD/SUB
X1*
14
12
15
X1*
7
6
7
Notes:
1. Maximum count rates given are for Process counter set for Auto reset with
the auto cycle preset set to an equivalent of 100 count pulses or greater.
With auto cycle presets less than 100 counts the maximum count rates may
be lower. The actual Preset value for 100 count pulses, with Count
SF=0.5000 and Count Scale Multiplier=X1, would be 50.
2. Maximum count rate given for X2 & X4 count modes are given for 50%
duty cycle signals and Quad signals with 90° phase shift.
*Inputs A & B count rates summed.
9. MAXIMUM COUNT CAPACITY:
Process or Count: 9 digits internal (non-scaled), 6 digits displayable (scaled)
Batch Count: 6 digits
Total Count: 11 digits internal (non-scaled), 8 digits displayable (scaled)
10. CONTROL INPUTS:
Programmable user inputs (4):
USR INP 1 to 3: Internal 10 KW pull-up to +5 VDC, VIL = 1.5 VMAX; VIH
= 3.5 VMIN, response time = 30 msec typical, 100 msec max. (count rate
dependent).
USR INP 4/INH: Internal 10 KW pull-up to +5 VDC, VIL = 1.5 VMAX,
VIH = 3.0 VMIN, response time = 30 msec typical, 100 msec max. (count
rate dependent).
INHIBIT Response time = 50 µsec max.
User Inputs Programmed for Binary Message Request: Debounce =
100 msec. (Binary message request inputs must be stable for 100 msec
before a message is requested).
11. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS:
Type: Jumper selectable RS-485 or RS-232.
Can connect up to 32 units when using RS-485 interface.
Baud Rate: Programmable from 1200 to 9600.
Maximum Addresses: Programmable from 00 to 99. (Actual number on a
line is limited by hardware specifications)
Transmit Delay: Programmable for 0.002 or 0.100 second.
Data Format: 10 Bit Frame; 1 start bit, 7 or 8 data bits, 1 or no parity bit,
and 1 stop bit. Parity is programmable for ODD (7 data bits), EVEN (7
data bits), or NO Parity (8 data bits).
12. OUTPUT(S):
Solid-State: Current sinking NPN open collector transistor.
VCE = 1.1 VSAT @ 100 mA max. VOH = 30 VDC max.
(Internal Zener Diode Protection).
Relay(s): Mounted on field-replaceable P.C. board. Form C contacts rated at
5 amps @ 120 VAC/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120
VAC (inductive load). The operate time is 5 msec nominal and the release
time is 3 msec nominal.
SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.
MODEL - LGPB
The process counter is used to monitor the count within the batch. Presets 1
through 4 can be assigned to the process counter or the rate indicator. Presets 3
and 4 can also be assigned to either the batch counter or totalizer.
Presets 1 and 2 can activate relay outputs 1 and 2 respectively. Presets 3 and
4 can activate the NPN open collector outputs O3-SNK and O4-SNK
respectively.
MODEL - LGPM
The Multi Preset unit has 6 presets which can control NPN open collector
outputs 01-SNK to 06-SNK respectively. Presets 1 through 6 can be assigned to
either the rate or count display.
STANDARD INDICATION DISPLAYS
& PRESETS FOR EACH MODEL
LGPB & LGPBF
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
PROCESS
BATCH
TOTAL
(4 Presets)
MODEL
LGPM
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
COUNT
(6 Presets)
217
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
12. OUTPUT(S): (Cont’d)
Programmable Timed Output(s): Programmable time ranges from 0.01 to
99.99 seconds, ±0.05% - 11 msec max.
Output Time Required To Request Message: 50 msec.
13. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
14. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
UL Recognized Component, File #E137808
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
EMC EMISSIONS:
Meets EN 50081-2: Industrial Environment.
CISPR 11 Radiated and conducted emissions
EMC IMMUNITY:
Meets EN 50082-2: Industrial Environment.
ENV 50140 - Radio-frequency radiated electromagnetic field
ENV 50141 - Radio-frequency conducted electromagnetic field 1 & 2
EN 61000-4-2 - Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-4 - Electrical fast transient/burst (EFT) 1
EN 61000-4-8 - Power frequency magnetic field
Notes:
1. Unit required a line filter (Corcom #1VB3) when DC powered. Test: EN
61000-4-4 EFT and ENV 50141 RF Conducted Immunity.
2. Ground shield or ferrite suppression core (TDK #ZCAT3035-1330A) at
device end (opposite end from unit) on serial communication cable
eliminates serial transmission garble.
15. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. (Panel gasket,
mounting clips, nut fasteners and screws included with unit.)
16. WEIGHT: 1.5 lbs. (0.68 Kg)
PROGRAMMING
The Legend Plus Series provides an easy to use, menu driven programming
interface. The English prompts, the front panel keypad, and the flashing display
aid the operator during programming. In the normal operating mode, the main
display loop allows the user to scroll through the four programmable indication
displays using the direction keys. From the main loop, presets and scale factors
can be accessed directly. All other parameters are accessed through the
programming loop, which can be set to require an access code number to enter
the loop. In the programming loop, parameters can be viewed or changed and
the operator can exit anywhere in the loop. The drawing at left shows the main
display loop and part of the programming loop of a Legend Plus unit. Also shown
above are four different views of the indication displays.
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS
PRESET(S)
Ranges from -99999 to 999999
Counter Load ranges from -99999 to 999999
SCALE FACTORS (RATE, COUNT & TOTAL)
Ranges from 0.0001 to 5.9999. The internal count value is multiplied by the
count scale factor and the count scale multiplier to provide the process count
display value. The total count is scaled by the count scale factor and the count
scale multiplier, and is additionally scaled by the total scale factor. The number
of negative edges is multiplied by the rate scale factor, the rate scale multiplier,
and the rate conversion factor to calculate the rate value.
COUNT SCALE MULTIPLIER
Multiplies the contents of the 9-digit internal counter or the 11-digit internal
totalizer by a factor of 1, 0.1, 0.01 or 0.001 to view the desired number of
significant digits on the 6-digit Counter display or the 8-digit Totalizer display.
DECIMAL POINT
Separate decimal point location for Count, Rate, and Total displays.
0
0.0
0.00
0.000
0.0000
0.00000
RATE SCALE MULTIPLIERS
Multiplies the contents of the actual internal rate, pulses per second (PPS), by
a factor of 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, or 1000 to view the desired number of significant
digits on the 6-digit Rate display. The desired time units for the rate can be
programmed as per Second (x1), per Minute (x60), or per Hour (x3600).
UPDATE TIME
The Rate Minimum and Maximum Update Times range from 0.1 to 99.9
seconds. This provides averaging capability for non-consistent pulse spacing.
Note: The maximum update time must be larger than the minimum update time.
COUNTING MODES
Count with Direction
Count with Direction (X2)
Quadrature
Quadrature (X2)
Quadrature (X4)
2-Input Anti-coincidence Add/Subtract
2-Input Anti-coincidence Add/Add
A separate Inhibit input is available for all count modes.
218
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS (Cont’d)
RESET MODES
Manual Reset
Automatic Reset at Preset
Reset at Beginning Of Output 1
Reset at End Of Timed Output 1
Reset at Beginning Of Output 2
Reset at End Of Timed Output 2
Reset at Beginning Of Output 1 or Output 2
Reset at End Of Timed Output 1 or Output 2
MODEL LGPB ONLY
Reset at Beginning Of Output 3
Reset at End Of Timed Output 3
Reset at Beginning Of Output 4
Reset at End Of Timed Output 4
Reset at Beginning Of Output 3 or Output 4
Reset at End Of Timed Output 3 or Output 4
Output Activation Mode:
Latched
Boundary
Timed - 0.01 to 99.99 seconds
Hi/Lo Acting:
This mode is used in conjunction with all Rate modes and the Boundary
count modes. A Lo acting output would perform the Output action when the
count/rate is lower than the preset. A Hi acting output would perform the
Output action when the count/rate is higher than or equal to the preset.
Rate Output On/Off Delay:
Used to prevent output chatter. Output condition must be satisfied for a
period of time longer than delay period for output state to change.
On Delay: Prevents activation of output(s) for the amount of time
programmed.
Off Delay: Prevents deactivation of output(s) for the amount of time
programmed.
On & Off Delay: This mode prevents output state change for specified delay
period when turning on or off.
Output Reset Mode:
Outputs 1 & 2 Only:
End Output 1 @ Output 2 Start
End Output 1 @ Timed Output 2 End
End Output 2 @ Output 1 Start
End Output 2 @ Timed Output 1 End
Output(s) Power Up or Power Down State:
The Output’s state can be set to be Off (Inactive) @ power up.
OR
The Output’s state can be saved @ power down and restored at power-up.
OR
The Output’s state can be set to be ON (Active) @ power up.
Note: Power down state for Latched Mode Only.
Reset Output when Count is Reset:
This feature can be enabled or disabled.
Request Message:
Each output can be programmed to request a specific message when the
output conditions are satisfied.
RESET ACTION
Reset to Zero: Count display value returns to zero when reset. Output activates,
if programmed, when the count equals the preset value.
Reset to Preset: Count display value returns to preset value when reset. Output
assigned to the specified preset activates, if programmed, when the count
equals zero.
Reset to Counter Load: Count display value returns to counter load value
when reset. Output activates, if programmed, when count equals the preset
value.
USER INPUTS
There are four external user inputs and two front panel Function keys that are
programmable. When activated, each user input can be programmed to perform
one of the following functions:
Maintained Reset or Momentary Reset:
Can reset Rate, Peak, Valley, Process*, Batch*, Total*, or Count* display
values and/or any output associated with that display.
* On Models with these available display options.
Reset Output(s):
Places the output(s) in their inactive state. (Momentary action)
Set Output(s):
Places the output(s) in their active state. (Momentary action)
View Display 1-4:
Causes the selected indication display (1, 2, 3, or 4) to be displayed and held
from anywhere in the main display loop. The current display value is frozen
(not updated) while the display is held.
Change Display:
Causes the indication display to toggle to the next indication display.
Request Message:
Requests a specific programmed message to activate.
Clear Message:
Causes the displayed message to be canceled. (Maintained action)
Skip Preset:
Keeps the output from activating and automatic reset from occurring, if
programmed, when the count value equals the preset value.
Counter Load:
Places the counter load value into the count display and operates from that
value. (Maintained action)
Print Request:
Transmits the values specified in the Program Print Options module over the
serial port. (Maintained action)
Program Disable:
Can be used alone, or in conjunction with the program disable DIP switch, to
provide a variety of program security modes. (External User Input only)
Inhibit Count:
Prevents pulses from being counted on Inputs A and B. (User Input 4 only).
The rate input is not affected by the inhibit setting and continues to display the
rate of the signal at Input A.
INDICATION DISPLAYS
Each of the four indication displays is programmed individually. Each line of
each indication display can be programmed to show a value mnemonic, a
numeric value, the output status, a preset value, the counter load value, or a
custom display line. The mnemonics are factory set to; RATE, PEAK,
VALLEY, COUNT*, PROCESS*, BATCH*, TOTAL*, and OVERFLOW.
Each mnemonic can be individually changed to a mnemonic tailored to a
specific application. The first character of the full mnemonic is displayed to the
left of the appropriate numeric value if the other line is not programmed to
display the full mnemonic. Each of the 4 indication displays can be programmed
to be green or red on dual color models.
* On Models with these available display options.
Scroll Speed:
None
2.5 Seconds
5.0 Seconds
Display Intensity:
The brightness of the display can be adjusted from 1 to 5, with 5 as the
brightest. There is a separate adjustment for each color.
Custom Display Line:
The Legend Plus has two Custom Display Lines which allow the user to
specify the number of digits to be displayed on the line, along with any alphanumeric prefix or suffix.
Program Mnemonic:
Allows the user to modify the mnemonics (RATE, PROCESS, BATCH, etc.)
to a mnemonic of your choice. For example, RATE can be changed to read
SPEED.
MESSAGES
There are ten messages that can be programmed in the Legend. The following
attributes can be set for each message.
Message Text:
Standard Characters - Lower/Upper case letters, numbers, punctuation
symbols
Extended Characters (Including most European characters)
Message Priority:
1 to 8 (1 = highest priority)
OUTPUT(S)
Output Assignment:
The LGPB can have outputs 1 through 4 assigned to the process or the rate.
Outputs 3 and 4 can also be assigned to the batch or total.
The LGPM can have outputs 1 through 6 assigned to either count or rate.
Phase:
Each output can have its active logic state set for positive phase (normally
off) or negative phase (normally on).
219
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS (Cont’d)
MESSAGES (Cont’d)
Message Type:
1 line block - message scrolls in block fashion on the top line of the display,
bottom line contains programmed indication display.
2 line block - message scrolls in block fashion on both lines of the display
1 line scroll - message scrolls right to left on the top line of the display,
bottom line contains programmed indication display
2 line scroll - Top line scrolls right to left, bottom line is blanked
Maintained/Momentary Request:
A Maintained Request setting enables messages to be restored or
redisplayed, when the display is available if the input/output action
requesting the message is still active.
A Momentary Message setting will allow only one request per message
requesting input/output action. Lower priority messages will be canceled by
higher priority messages.
Blinking Message:
Enables the message to blink when displayed. Only available with 1 or 2 line
block messages.
Multiplex:
Setting this parameter to yes will cause the unit to display the message for 2
seconds, then display the programmed display for 2 seconds. Only available
with 1 or 2 line block messages.
Message Cancellation:
The displayed message is canceled when:
A message of equal or higher priority is requested.
Message times out (Timed) and input/output is deactivated.
User input or output is deactivated (Til End).
User input programmed for clear message is activated.
Message Time:
Ranges from 1 to 599 Seconds.
Message Color: (Dual Color Option only)
Green or Red
COMMUNICATION PORT
Jumper selectable for RS-485 or RS-232
Baud Rate - 1200 to 9600
Parity - Odd (7 data bits), Even (7 data bits), or No parity (8 data bits)
Unit Address - 00 to 99
Transmit Delay - 0.002 or 0.100 seconds
PRINT OPTIONS
The programmable print options specify which values are transmitted when
a print request is issued. The available options are; Rate, Peak, Valley, Count*,
Process*, Batch*, Total*, Scale Factors, Preset(s), Counter Load values, and
Message 0.
* On Models with these available display options.
The unit can be programmed to transmit or NOT to transmit mnemonics (unit
address & value identifiers). The mnemonic transmitted is the first three
characters of the programmed display mnemonic. For total, only the first
character is transmitted. A transmit and reset count capability allows the
selected count values to automatically reset after the value is printed
(transmitted).
OPERATOR ACCESS TO FRONT PANEL
There are several program disable modes that can be used to limit the
operator from programming the parameter values via the front panel keypad.
The Program Disable DIP switch can be used alone or in conjunction with a
User Input, programmed for the program disable function and a programmable
code value, to provide the desired level of security.
MODEL LGPB APPLICATION
A local canning plant wishes to improve the display and control
capabilities of its nine process lines. There is a requirement to add message
interaction for the operators during process operation. The following
application facts and requirements have been specified by the plant engineer.
1. The cans are sensed by a photo-electric device specially suited for can
manufacturing. The device produces one pulse per can.
2. The can count for the process of boxing the cans is the first requirement.
The can count is never changed, there are always 24 cans to each box. An
output is required at 20 cans to slow the line temporarily until the second
output is turned on. The second output changes the gate direction to begin
the next grouping of 24. The second output has a time delay output of 2
seconds. After the time delay, both outputs are reset and ready for the next
process cycle.
3. A count of the number of batches is required for each 8-hour shift. This
count is recorded and reset by the manufacturing computer.
4. A total count of cans produced per 24-hour period is required. This count
is also transmitted to the manufacturing computer, and reset as required via
the communication link.
5. A display of cans per minute is required with minimum and maximum
speed limits. Output 3 activates below 100 counts per minute and Output 4
activates above 500 counts per minute.
6. The four desired displays are process, batch, total, and rate. These are to be
scrolled via the front panel.
7. The customer also wants the following messages displayed when the listed
events occur:
Output 3 - Line #4 Slow
Output 4 - Overspd STOP! (Wants this display to stand out and have top
priority)
Proximity 1 - Check Label Glue
Proximity 2 - Check Top Supply
Proximity 3 - System Fault! Stop Line #4! (Wants this display to stand out
and have top priority)
8. Once the unit is set up, the only front panel access should be for a reset of
the process count and viewing of the displays.
The following page is a chart of the necessary programming for the Legend
Plus unit.
220
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
LEGEND PLUS PROGRAM SHEET
RATE
SCALING
COUNT SF
RATE SF
TOT SF
CNT. SCM
CNT. D.P.
RATE SCM
RATE PER
RATE D.P.
TOT D.P.
CHG. CNT
MIN. TIME
MAX. TIME
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
X1.0
0
X1.0
MINUTE
0
0
YES
MESSAGE
1.0
5.0
COUNTER
CNT. INPUT
PRC. RST.
P AUTO. RS
BAT. RST.
B AUTO. RS
TOT. RST.
CT+DIRX1
TO ZERO
OUT2
TO ZERO
DISABLED
TO ZERO
USER INPUTS
BIN. MSG.REQ.NONE
USER INP. 1
REQMSG#5
USER INP. 3
REQMSG#4
USER F1
NO MODE
USER INP. 2
USER INP. 4
USER F2
REQMSG#6
CLRMSG
MNT.RST
PRC-YES
OUTPUT 3
ASSIGNED
PHASE
TYPE
ACT/TIME
OFF @ P.
RST/C
REQ MSG #
TO PRC
+
LATCHED
@OUT2END
[email protected]
EN
TO RATE
+
BOUNDARY
LO ACT
[email protected]
EN
2
OUTPUT 2
ASSIGNED
PHASE
TYPE
ACT/TIME
OUTPUT END
OFF @ P.
RST/C
REQ MSG #
OUTPUT 4
ASSIGNED
PHASE
TYPE
ACT/TIME
OFF @ P.
RST/C
REQ MSG #
TO PRC
+
TIMED
2.00
DISABLED
[email protected]
EN
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
PRESETS
P1
P2
P3
P4
CL
PRIORITY
TYPE
BLINKING
MULTIPLEX
CANCEL
TIME SEC.
COLOR
8
2L BLOCK
NO
NO
TIL END
MSG. #2
TEXT
2
LINE #4
SLOW
7
2L BLOCK
YES
YES
TIL END
MSG. #3
TEXT
PRIORITY
TYPE
BLINKING
MULTIPLEX
CANCEL
TIME SEC.
COLOR
TO RATE
+
BOUNDARY
HI ACT
[email protected]
EN
3
GREEN
MSG. #4
4
TEXT
SYSTEM
STOP LINE #4
FAULT
PRIORITY
5
TYPE
2L BLOCK
BLINKING
YES
MULTIPLEX
NO
CANCEL
TIMED
TIME SEC.
1
COLOR
RED
5
CHECK LABEL
GLUE
PRIORITY
6
TYPE
1L SCROL
BLINKING
MULTIPLEX
CANCEL
TIMED
TIME SEC.
1
COLOR
GREEN
MSG. #5
TEXT
GREEN
6
CHECK TOP
SUPPLY
PRIORITY
6
TYPE
1L SCROL
BLINKING
MULTIPLEX
CANCEL
TIMED
TIME SEC.
1
COLOR
GREEN
MSG. #6
TEXT
3
OVERSPD
STOP
5
2L BLOCK
YES
YES
TIL END
RED
DISPLAY
OPTIONS
ACCESS
P1
P2
P3
P4
CTLD.
SF’S
1
GATE CHANGE
PRIORITY
TYPE
BLINKING
MULTIPLEX
CANCEL
TIME SEC.
COLOR
OUTPUTS
OUTPUT 1
ASSIGNED
PHASE
TYPE
ACT/TIME
OUTPUT END
OFF @ P.
RST/C
REQ MSG #
MSG. #1
TEXT
20
24
100
500
0
DISPLY 1
D1 LINE 1
D1 LINE 2
D1 COLOR
CUSTOM 2
OUTPUTS
GREEN
DISPLY 2
D2 LINE 1
D2 LINE 2
D2 COLOR
BAT-MNE
BAT-VAL
GREEN
DISPLY 3
D3 LINE 1
D3 LINE 2
D3 COLOR
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
GREEN
DISPLY 4
D4 LINE 1
D4 LINE 2
D4 COLOR
TOT-MNE
TOT-VAL
GREEN
MNEMONIC
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
PROC/CNT
BATCH
TOTAL
OVERFLOW
SPEED
P
V
CANS
CASES
TOT.CANS
OVERFLOW
SCRO. SPD
NONE
DSP. LEVEL G 10
R 10
CUST. DSP.
CUST.DSP.1
PRESET TRACKING
P1 TRACK
NONE
P2 TRACK
NONE
P3 TRACK
NONE
P4 TRACK
NONE
PRO. CODE
33
CUST. DPS.2
VAL-RATE
-CPM
VAL-PRC
-CANS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
LGPB
LGPM
LGPBF
SFLGP
PART NUMBER
115/230 VAC
& +12VDC
DESCRIPTION
Four Preset Batch Legend Plus w/Grn Backlighting
Four Preset Batch Legend Plus w/Red Backlighting
Four Preset Batch Legend Plus w/Dual Color Backlighting
Multi-Preset (6) Legend Plus w/Grn Backlighting
Multi-Preset (6) Legend Plus w/Red Backlighting
Multi-Preset (6) Legend Plus w/Dual Color Backlighting
Four Preset Foot-Inch Counter w/Red Backlighting
Legend Plus Programming Software, 3 1/2”, 1.44 M Disk
Dual Relay Board (Model LGPB’s only)
LGPB0000
LGPB0100
LGPB0200
LGPM0001
LGPM0101
LGPM0201
LGPBF100
SFLGP
RLYLG002
221
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
BULLETIN NO. LEGEND-C
DRAWING NO. LP0324
REVISED 3/97
LEGEND SERIES
MODEL LGS -Single Preset Counter/Rate Indicator
MODEL LGD - Dual Preset Counter/Rate Indicator
MODEL LGB - Four Preset Batch/Counter/Rate Indicator
MODEL LGM - Six Preset Counter/Rate Indicator
DESCRIPTION
The Legend Series consist of four different models that are multi-function
count and rate indicators. There can be up to six presets and six programmable
outputs depending upon the unit. The count and rate displays have separate
programmable decimal point settings. The unit also has rate peak and valley
displays that show the highest and lowest rate readings since they were reset
(peak and valley readings are not retained when power is removed). There are
five Programmable User Inputs, three external remote inputs and two front
panel function keys, which allow the user to select from a variety of functions.
The two line by eight character alphanumeric display with English menus,
allows for easy viewing and simple programming of the units. The four scroll
through indication displays can be programmed to show other parameters and
if desired, automatically scroll at one of the two programmable rates. A
program disable DIP switch used with an external User Input can be utilized to
protect the settings and guarantee that no unwanted changes occur during
operation.
The standard RS-485 serial communication feature provides the capability
of two-way communication between the Legend unit and other compatible
equipment such as a printer, a programmable controller, or a host computer.
The Baud Rate is programmable and ranges from 1200 to 9600. The unit
address number can be programmed from 00-99. Up to thirty-two units can be
installed on a single pair of wires, each with an individual address. The Count
value(s), Preset(s), Rate, Peak, Valley, etc can all be interrogated or changed.
The output(s), counters(s), rate and peak readings can be reset, by sending the
proper command codes via serial communications or by activating a
programmable user input. When a user input, selected for the print request
function, is activated, the values specified in the Program Print Options module
can be transmitted to a printer.
Optional Programming Software (SFLGP) for IBM® compatible PC’s is
available to program all of the Legend configuration parameters such as User
Inputs, count modes, etc. The software allows unit configurations to be created,
uploaded, downloaded, and saved to a file for rapid programming of the
Legend.
The Legend offers a choice of seven programmable counting modes for use
in applications requiring Bi-directional, Anti-coincidence, and Quadrature
counting. A separate external inhibit terminal can be used in conjunction with
any of the count modes. The input circuitry is switch selectable to accept
signals from a variety of input sources. A unit may be programmed to register
counts on both edges of the input signal providing frequency doubling
capability.
DIMENSIONS “In inches (mm)”
l
2X8 TRANSMISSIVE LCD, NEGATIVE IMAGE, WITH L.E.D.
BACKLIGHTING
l
FOUR USER PROGRAMMABLE INDICATION DISPLAYS
l
OPTIONAL PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
l
ENGLISH PROGRAMMING MENUS
l
RATE, PEAK & VALLEY INDICATION
l
ABILITY TO LOCKOUT OPERATOR ACCESS TO PROGRAMMING
PARAMETERS
l
ACCEPTS COUNT RATES UP TO 23 KHz (for Model LGS)
l
BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL
l
QUADRATURE SENSING (Up to 4 times resolution)
l
COUNT INHIBIT PIN AVAILABLE FOR ALL COUNT MODES
l
SEPARATE INPUT SCALING FOR RATE & COUNT
l
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUTS
l
INPUTS ARE SWITCH SELECTABLE FOR MAGNETIC PICKUPS
l
RELAY OUTPUT(S) (Field Replaceable)
l
OUTPUT(S) ASSIGNABLE TO COUNT OR RATE
l
SOLID STATE CURRENT SINKING OUTPUT(S)
l
115/230VAC SWITCH SELECTABLE
l
RS-485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
l
NONVOLATILE MEMORY
l
NEMA4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT PANEL BEZEL
and
UL Recognized Component,
File #E137808
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 3.0” (76.2)H x 4.0” (101.6)W.
PANEL CUT-OUT
210
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KW pull-down, 7.3 mA @ 28 VDCMAX.
Debounce: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce.
Limits count speed to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec min.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak.
Hysteresis: 100 mV.
Input impedance: 3.9 KW @ 60 Hz.
Maximum input voltage: ±50 Vp
Note: For magnetic pickup input, the sink/source DIP switch must be in
the SRC position.
6. RATE ACCURACY: ±0.01%
7. RATE MINIMUM INPUT FREQUENCY: 0.01 Hz.
8. MAXIMUM COUNT RATE IN KHz:
DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
A Legend unit will indicate an overflow condition when the capacity of a
Count display (Process, Batch, or Total) is exceeded, by flashing the word
“OVERFLOW” in the appropriate display.
All count values and program setting are retained when unit power is
removed in nonvolatile memory.
The choice of several reset cycle modes along with the compatibility of count
and control inputs to other RLC products, provides added versatility for standalone and system counter needs.
The rate input uses the time interval method (1/tau) to calculate the rate
value. This method insures high resolution at all input rates. The unit counts
input pulses and after the programmable minimum update time elapses and the
next count edge occurs, the unit will take the number of edges that occurred
during the elapsed time to calculate the rate value. The minimum update time
can be as low as 0.1 second per update, enabling quick response to rate changes.
At slower rates, averaging can be accomplished by programming the Minimum
and Maximum Update Time for the desired response. Extensive scaling
capabilities allow practically any reading at very slow input rates.
The construction of the Legend series is a light weight high impact plastic
case with a clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone
rubber keypad meets NEMA4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or
dusty environments, when properly installed. Plug-in style terminal blocks
simplify installation and wiring change-outs.
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.
MODELS - LGS & LGD
The single preset unit has one NPN open collector output and the dual preset
unit has two outputs which are activated from presets 1 and 2 respectively. Each
output can be assigned to either Rate or Count display. An optional relay board
can be installed that operates in parallel with the solid state output(s).
MODEL - LGB
The process counter is used to monitor the progress of the count within the
batch. Presets 1 and 2 are assigned to the Process Counter and activate relay
outputs 1 and 2 respectively.
Presets 3 and 4 can be assigned to either the Batch Counter, Totalizer, or Rate
indicator. Presets 3 and 4 activate the NPN open collector outputs O3-SNK and
O4-SNK respectively.
MODEL - LGM
The Multi Preset unit has six Presets (1-6) which control NPN open collector
outputs 01-SNK to 06-SNK respectively. Preset one through four are assigned
to the count display. Presets 5 and 6 can be assigned to either the Rate or Count
display.
AVAILABLE INDICATION DISPLAYS
AND PRESETS FOR EACH MODEL
LGD
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
COUNT
(2 Presets)
LGB
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
PROCESS
BATCH
TOTAL
(4 Presets)
CNT + DIR
LGS (Single Preset)
LGD (Dual Preset)
LGB (Batch)
LGM (Six Preset)
X1
23
20
17
15
X2
11
10
8
7
QUAD
X1
9
8.5
7
7
X2
7
7
7
7
X4
5.5
5
4
3
ADD/ADD
ADD/SUB
X1*
23
20
17
15
X1*
12
10
9
8
Notes:
1. Maximum count rates given are for Process counter set for Auto reset with
the auto cycle preset set to an equivalent of 100 count pulses or greater.
With auto cycle presets less than 100 count pulses, with Count SF =
0.5000 and Count Scale Multiplier = X1, would be 50.
2. Maximum count rate given for X2 & X4 count modes are given for 50%
duty cycle signals and Quad signals with 90o phase shift.
*Inputs A & B count rates summed.
9. CONTROL INPUTS:
Programmable user inputs (3): Internal 10 KW pull-up to +5 VDC,
VIL = 1.0 VMAX; VIH = 4.0 VMIN, response time = 10 msec.
Inhibit: Internal 10 KW pull-up to +5 VDC, VIL = 1.0MAX; VIH = 4.0 VMIN.
10. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS:
Type: RS-485 Multi-point Balanced Interface (2 Wire).
(Can connect up to 32 units on a single pair of wires)
Baud Rate: Programmable from 1200 to 9600.
Maximum Addresses: Programmable from 00 to 99.
(Actual number on a single pair of wires is limited by serial hardware
specifications)
Transmit Delay: Programmable for 0.002 or 0.100 second.
Data Format: 10 Bit Frame; 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 parity bit, and 1 stop
bit. Parity is programmable for either ODD, EVEN, or No Parity.
11. OUTPUT(S):
Solid-State: Current sinking NPN open collector transistor.
VCE = 1VSAT @ 100 mA max. VOH = 30 VDC max.
(Internal Zener Diode Protection).
Relay(s): Mounted on field-replaceable P.C. board. Form C contacts rated at
5 amps @ 120 VAC/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120
VAC (inductive load). The operate time is 5 msec nominal and the release
time is 3 msec nominal.
Programmable Timed Output(s): Programmable time ranges from 0.01 to
99.99 seconds, ±0.05% - 11 msec max.
12. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C
to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
13. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
UL Recognized Component, File #E137808
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
EMC EMISSIONS:
Meets EN 50081-2: Industrial Environment.
CISPR 11 Radiated and conducted emissions
EMC IMMUNITY:
Meets EN 50082-2: Industrial Environment.
ENV 50140 - Radio-frequency radiated electromagnetic field
ENV 50141 - Radio-frequency conducted electromagnetic field 1 & 2
EN 61000-4-2 - Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-4 - Electrical fast transient/burst (EFT) 1
EN 61000-4-8 - Power frequency magnetic field
Notes:
1. RF Conducted and EFT Immunity DC Power lines
Unit required a line filter (RLC # LFIL0000) when DC powered.
2. RF Conducted Immunity I/O lines
Ground the shield or use one ferrite suppression core (TDK #ZCAT30351330A) on serial communication cable to eliminate serial transmission
garble.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
SAFETY SUMMARY
LGS
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
COUNT
(1 Preset)
MODEL
LGM
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
COUNT
(6 Presets)
SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 2x8, 0.3” (7 mm) high characters, negative image transmissive
LCD, with yellow/green or red LED backlighting.
2. POWER:
AC Operation: 115/230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable.
DC Operation: +12 VDC ±20% @ 250 mA.
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile memory retains all programming information.
Count and Preset values are written to non-volatile memory when power is
interrupted. All other programming parameters are written to memory when
programming mode is exited. If power is removed while in the programming
menus, the parameters are restored to previously saved settings.
Data Retention: 10 years minimum
4. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC±25% @ 100 mA.
5. INPUTS A and B: DIP Switch selectable to accept count pulses from a
variety of sources including switch contacts, outputs from CMOS or TTL
circuits, and all standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 VMAX; VIH = 3.75 VMIN.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KW pulled up internally to +12 VDC,
IMAX = 1.6 mA.
211
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
14. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
installed properly. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clips included.
15. WEIGHT: 1.5 lbs. (0.68 Kg)
PROGRAMMING
The Legend Series provides an easy to use, menu driven programming
interface. The English prompts, the front panel keypad, and the flashing display
aids the operator during programming. In the normal run mode, the main
display loop allows the user to scroll through the four programmable indication
displays, using the direction keys. From the main loop, presets and scale factors
can be accessed directly for changing parameters. All other parameters are
accessed through the programming loop. In the programming loop, parameters
can be viewed or changed and the operator can exit anywhere in the loop.
Shown to the side is part of the main display loop and part of the programming
loop of a Dual Preset Legend (LGD) unit. Also shown are four different views
of the indication displays.
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS
PRESET(S)
Ranges from -99999 to 999999
Counter Load ranges from -99999 to 999999
COUNTING MODES
Count with Direction
Count with Direction (X2)
Quadrature
Quadrature (X2)
Quadrature (X4)
2-Input Anti-coincidence Add/Add
2-Input Anti-coincidence Add/Subtract
A separate Inhibit input, is available for all count modes.
SCALE FACTORS (RATE & COUNT)
Range from 0.0001 to 5.9999
COUNT SCALE MULTIPLIER
Multiplies the contents of the 9-digit internal counter or the 11-digit internal
totalizer by a factor of 1, 0.1, 0.01 or 0.001 to view the desired number of
significant digits on the 6-digit Counter display or the 8-digit Totalizer display.
RESET MODES
Manual Reset
Automatic Reset at Preset
Reset at Beginning Of Output 1
Reset at End Of Timed Output 1
Reset at Beginning Of Output 2
Reset at End Of Timed Output 2
Reset at Beginning Of Output 1 or Output 2
Reset at End Of Timed Output 1 or Output 2
DECIMAL POINT
Separate decimal point location for Count and Rate displays.
0
0.0
0.00
0.000
0.0000
0.00000
RATE SCALE MULTIPLIERS
Multiplies the contents of the actual internal rate, pulses per second (PPS),
by a factor of 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, or 1000 to view the desired number of
significant digits on the 6-digit Rate display. The desired time units that the rate
is to be displayed, can also be programmed as per Second (x1), per Minute
(x60), or per Hour (x3600).
MODEL LGB ONLY
Reset at Beginning Of Output 3
Reset at End Of Timed Output 3
Reset at Beginning Of Output 4
Reset at End Of Timed Output 4
Reset at Beginning Of Output 3 or Output 4
Reset at End Of Timed Output 3 or Output 4
UPDATE TIME
The Rate Minimum/Maximum Update Times range from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds
which provides averaging capability for non-consistent pulse spacing.
212
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS (Cont’d)
RESET ACTION
Reset to Zero: Output activates when the count equals the preset value. Count
display value returns to zero when reset.
Reset to Preset: Output activates when the count equals zero. Count display
value returns to preset value when reset.
Reset to Counter Load: Output activates when count equals the preset value.
Count display value returns to counter load value when reset.
Output Reset Mode:
Outputs 1 & 2 Only:
End Output 1 @ Output 2 Start
End Output 1 @ Timed Output 2 End
End Output 2 @ Output 1 Start
End Output 2 @ Timed Output 1 End
Output(s) Power Up or Power Down State:
The Output’s state can be set to be Off (Inactive) @ power up.
OR
The Output’s state can be saved @ power down and restored at power-up.
Note: Power down state for Latched Mode Only.
Reset Output when Count is Reset:
This feature can be enabled or disabled.
Phase:
Each Output can have its logic state set for Positive (ON) Phase or
Negative (OFF) Phase.
USER INPUTS
There are three external user inputs and two front panel Function keys that
are programmable. When activated each User Input can be programmed to
perform one of the following functions:
Maintained Reset or Momentary Reset:
Can reset Rate, Peak, Valley, Process*, Batch*, Total*, or Count* display
values and/or any output associated with that display.
*Models with the available display.
Reset Output(s):
Places the output(s) in their inactive state. (Momentary action)
Set Output(s):
Places the output(s) in their active state. (Momentary action)
View Display 1-4:
Will cause the selected indication display (1, 2, 3, or 4) to be displayed and
held from anywhere in the main display loop.
Change Display:
Will cause the indication display to toggle to the next indication display.
Counter Load:
Loads the counter load value into the count display.
Print Request:
Transmits the values specified in the Program Print Options module over the
serial port.
Skip Preset 1, Skip Preset 3 (LGB Only):
Keeps the output from activating and automatic reset from occurring, if
programmed, when the count value equals the preset value.
Program Disable:
Operates in conjunction with the program disable DIP switch, to provide a
variety of program disable modes.
INDICATION DISPLAYS
There are four configurable indication displays are programmed
individually. Each line of each indication display can be programmed to show
one of the following Mnemonics; COUNT*, PROCESS*, BATCH*, TOTAL*,
PEAK, VALLEY, OR RATE, and a Numeric value, Output status, Preset value,
or the Counter Load value. A single or dual character Mnemonic is displayed
to the left of the appropriate Numeric value if the other line is not programmed
to display the full mnemonic. Also the indication displays can be set to scroll
automatically at a 2.5 or 5 second rate, if desired.
* Models with the available display.
COMMUNICATION PORT
Baud Rate - 1200 to 9600
Parity - Odd, Even, or No parity
Unit Address - 00 to 99
Transmit Delay - 0.002 or 0.100 seconds
PRINT OPTIONS
The programmable print options specify which values will be transmitted
when a print request is issued. The available options are; Rate, Peak, Valley,
Count*, Totalizer*, Process*, Batch*, Scale Factors, Preset(s), and Counter
Load values.
* Models with the available display.
OUTPUT(S)
Output Assignment:
The LGS can have its Output assigned to the Count or the Rate.
The LGD can have Outputs 1 & 2 assigned to the Count or the Rate.
The LGB has Outputs 1 & 2 assigned to the Process. Outputs 3 and 4 can be
assigned to the Batch, Total, or Rate.
The LGM can have Outputs 5 and 6 assigned to either Count or Rate and
Outputs 1-4 are assigned to the Counter.
Output Activation Mode:
Latched
Boundary
Timed - 0.01 to 99.99 seconds
The unit can be programmed to transmit or NOT transmit mnemonics (unit
address & value identifiers).
OPERATOR ACCESS TO FRONT PANEL
There are several program disable modes that can be used to limit the
operator from programming the parameter values via the front panel keypad.
The Program Disable DIP switch can be used alone or in conjunction with a
User Input, programmed for the program disable function, to provide the
desired level of security.
213
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
MODEL LGB APPLICATION
An order requires that sheets of material be cut in two different lengths. The operator would like to change the settings for the second
length to be cut with no down time. A Legend series LGB (Four Preset Batch Counter/Rate Indicator) is used to satisfy the requirement.
A Lenght Sensor (LSQ) with a 100 pulse per revolution (PPR) quadrature output is coupled with an LSAHC hinge clamp assemby and
a one foot circumference wheel. The LEGEND series LGB is set to the Quadrature X1 mode. With a one foot wheel, the information
becomes 100pulses/foot and allows the material to be cut to the nearest 1/100 of a foot. The counter display is programmed for two decimal
places to provide a readout in 1/100 of a foot increments.
Preset value P1 (Process count)
is programmed for the first length
to be cut for the order and Preset
value P2 (Process count) for the
second length.
The outputs are used to control
power to the cutting knife and the
counter is programmed to reset
when Preset 1 or Preset 2 is
reached.
Preset value P3 (Batch count) is
programmed to activate User Input
1 (skip P1) when the total number
of pieces is reached for the first
order. Preset value P4 (Batch
count) is programmed to stop the
process after the second order is
complete. The totalizer will keep
track of the total amount of feet
used.
214
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
LGM APPLICATION
A process performs five different procedures to a piece of raw stock at five different locations. The Legend series LGM with six presets
and six solid state outputs is used for this application.
The raw stock comes in ten foot sections and requires five various operations to be performed at 9.00”, 23.00”, 72.00”, 83.00”, &
111.00”. A rotary pulse generator (RPGB) with a 600 pulse per revolution (PPR) quadrature output is coupled to a 1 foot circumference
wheel. A quadrature sensor is specified because the stock must be reversed after stations #1 and #4. This allows the Legend to keep track
of true position.
The Legend is set to the quadrature X2 mode
which increases the pulses to 1200 PPR. This gives a
measurement resolution of 1/100 of an inch. The five
Presets are programmed with the proper values and
the solid state outputs control pilot relays that control
the actuators. As the material passes each station, a
signal is sent to the proper equipment and the process
is performed. Also, the outputs are programmed so
that if a power outage occurs they will save the state
that they were in at power down.
The sixth output is assigned to rate so that if the
rate drops below a predetermined value the output
will activate a warning indicator.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
LGS
LGD
LGB
LGM
_
_
_
DESCRIPTION
Single Preset Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Single Preset Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Single Preset Legend w/Red Backlighting
Single Preset Legend w/Red Backlighting
Dual Preset Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Dual Preset Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Dual Preset Legend w/Red Backlighting
Dual Preset Legend w/Red Backlighting
Four Preset Batch Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Four Preset Batch Legend w/Red Backlighting
Multi Preset (6) Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Multi Preset (6) Legend w/Red Backlighting
Legend Programming Software, 3.5”, 1.44M disk
Single Relay Board
Dual Relay Board
OPTION w/
RELAY BOARD
PART NUMBERS
115/230 VAC
& +12 VDC
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
LGS00001
LGS00000
LGS00101
LGS00100
LGD00001
LGD00000
LGD00101
LGD00100
LGB00000
LGB00100
LGM00001
LGM00101
SFLGP
RLYLG001
RLYLG002
215
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc.-230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370-Main Office: (650) 588-9200-Outside Local Area: (800) 258-9200-www.stevenengineering.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement